JP6751228B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating information regarding a ratio .

In a conventional gaming machine, it is known that a cumulative value of the number of payouts is stored and a transition of the cumulative value of the payout number is displayed by a graph by a player's operation (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2007-125121, A

Although it is possible to confirm the cumulative value of the number of payouts in a conventional gaming machine, for example, in a slot machine that executes AT, it was not possible to know the ratio of AT to the entire game.
Moreover, it is not possible to judge whether the value is within the design value range or the like only by displaying the cumulative value of the number of payouts.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to make it possible to confirm the ratio easily and accurately.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solution means (shown in parentheses is the configuration of a corresponding embodiment).
The invention of claim 1 is
As a game section,
A first section (normal section) that does not inform the player of an advantageous operation mode,
And a second section (advantageous section) capable of informing the player of an advantageous operation mode,
A predetermined storage area including the first storage area (the value corresponding to the number of advantageous-zone games of "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27) and the second storage area (total number of games of "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) Storage means (RWM53),
A first updating unit (steps S105 to S107, S114 in FIG. 32) capable of updating the information stored in the first storage area;
Second updating means (steps S110 to S113 in FIG. 32) capable of updating the information stored in the second storage area;
An external signal output means (external signal transmission means 70),
When the information stored in the first storage area reaches a predetermined upper limit value (3 bytes full), the information stored in the first storage area and the information stored in the second storage area Not to update
Based on the information stored in the first storage area and the information stored in the second storage area, the second section ratio (for example, the rate of staying in the second section with respect to all the game sections) It is possible to generate information on the ratio of advantageous intervals),
The external signal output means can output information regarding the second section ratio, which is the ratio of staying in the second section to all the game sections, to the outside,
When the game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, "1500" times) in the second section, the second section is finished.

According to the present invention , the ratio can be confirmed easily and accurately. Further, it is possible to easily judge whether or not the ratio is within the design value range.

FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in the present embodiment. It is a figure showing storage number display LED, an advantageous section display LED, acquisition number display LED, a settlement switch, etc. It is a figure which shows the main control board accommodated in the board case, (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a diagram showing a display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, a positional relationship of each reel, an effective line and the like. It is a figure (1) which shows the kind of winning combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (2) which shows the kind of winning combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (3) which shows the kind of winning combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (4) which shows the kind of winning combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (5) which shows the kind of winning combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (6) which shows the kind of winning combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of symbols. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition device, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition device, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition device, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition device, its winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (1) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure (2) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure which shows a pushing order instruction number table. It is a figure which shows the relationship of a push order instruction|indication number, an advantageous push order, and display content. It is the figure which shows the production group number table. It is a figure explaining transfer of RT. It is a figure which shows the lighting process of the advantageous area display LED. It is a timing chart (Example 1 and Example 2) showing the flow of processing of the main control board, the acquired number display LED, and the image display device. It is a timing chart (Example 3 and Example 4) showing the flow of processing of the main control board, the acquired number display LED, and the image display device. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display of the pushing order instruction|indication information by acquisition number display LED, and the notification of the correct answer pushing order by an image display apparatus. It is a part of RWM, and is a diagram showing a storage area relating to an advantageous zone and the total number of games. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure which shows the storage area regarding the total number of payouts. It is a part of RWM, and is a diagram showing a storage area related to the number of payouts at the time of continuous winning effect operation. It is a part of RWM, and is a diagram showing a storage area relating to the number of payouts at the time of operating the accessory. It is a figure (modification) which is a part of RWM and shows the storage area regarding the number of payouts at the time of continuous winning effect operation. It is a flow chart showing a flow of processing which updates a game count etc. using a register. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 3 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32. It is the flowchart which shows the flow of the processing which renews the game frequency and the like without using the register. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of operation processing of an advantageous section ratio. It is a figure explaining the information displayed on a management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on the storage number display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on the acquisition number display LED. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view showing a base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. It is a figure which shows the main control board accommodated in the board|substrate case in 2nd Embodiment, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. FIG.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
“RT” means that the type (number) of the condition device (1BB, replay, small role) to be selected by lottery and its winning probability are in a unique lottery state, and “RT transition” means one It means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) that is a lottery target changes by shifting from RT to another RT. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay in one RT is a value peculiar to that RT, and one RT and another RT have the same winning probability for each type of replay. Absent. However, the total value of the winning probabilities of the replay may be the same for one RT and another RT.

The RT includes a non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 in this embodiment (FIG. 22 described later).
Note that “non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, and is equivalent to “RT0”. Therefore, the term “RT” used herein includes non-RT.
In this embodiment, the non-inside is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the inside is RT4. The type (number) of replays subject to the lottery and the winning probability thereof are different between the non-inside and the inside.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RT during the special game. In the present embodiment, at least one replay lottery is performed in both the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation.
The “role” means a target of a lottery, and in the present embodiment, a condition device is selected by lottery, and the condition device is set to include at least one hand. Therefore, when one of the condition devices is won, at least one winning combination is won (having at least one winning combination).

The condition device to be selected by lottery has a "feature condition device" including any of "special roles (features)" and a "winning and replay condition device" including either a small win or replay. ..
The "role item condition device" includes any of the special roles. When a special part wins, SB (single bonus), RB (first-class special part; regular bonus), CB (second-class special part; challenge bonus), which is a device for facilitating the winning of a small part, 1BB (first-class accessory continuous operation device; first-class big bonus) and 2BB (second-class accessory continuous operation device; second-class big bonus) operate.

Here, the first-class role product continuous operation device (1BB) is a device that can continuously operate the first-class role product (RB).
Similarly, the second-class accessory continuous operation device (2BB) refers to a device that can continuously operate the second-class special accessory (CB).
In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later are provided.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either the winning of the winning combination or the two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on condition that the ending condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. ..
Further, in the present embodiment, SB, CB and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the "winning and replay condition device" includes either a small win or a replay in which the winning information is not carried over after the next game.
In this embodiment, the winning and replay condition device numbers “0” to “30” are provided.
On the other hand, the "feature condition device" includes one of RB, 1BB and 2BB which can carry over the winning information after the next game, and one of SB and CB which does not carry the winning information after the next game, In the present embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) that can carry over the winning information after the next game is provided.

When the winning information is won for a character condition device that includes one of the special roles that can be carried over after the next game, until the combination of symbols corresponding to that special role stops on the activated line, the winning information of the special role Will be carried over to the next game.
Then, a game in which the winning information is not won in the accessory condition device that includes any of the special roles that can be carried over after the next game is referred to as "non-inside". On the other hand, if you win the character condition device, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning special combination is not yet stopped on the activated line, that is, the game that carries the winning information of the special combination "inside" Say. In the present embodiment, the game won by the accessory condition device is included in "non-inside", but the game won by the accessory condition device may be included in "inside".

The "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch is an operation mode in which a combination with a large number of payouts is won in a game in which a game result (combination of symbols stopped on the activated line) is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch. Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a winning combination is won for a role that does not move (promote) to an advantageous RT or does not move (fall) to an unfavorable RT. The “advantageous operation mode” is also called a correct operation mode.

The "operation mode" is a concept indicating the pressing order of the stop switch and/or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the effective line).
Then, in the present embodiment, the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" is a game at the time of winning the push order bell (small winning combination B group, small winning combination C group), duplicate replay (replay B group, replay C group). ) Corresponds to the game at the time of winning.

In addition, when the push order bell is elected, the bell (small role) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct answer push order is higher It may be referred to as a bell (small winning combination) in which it is the most advantageous for the player to display a combination of symbols such as the most small winning combinations.
On the other hand, when the push switch bell is elected, when the stop switch is operated in the wrong push sequence, there are cases where the cheap bell wins and cases where the winning combination is dropped depending on the operation timing of the stop switch. In the present embodiment, a stop result (combination of symbols on the activated line. Also referred to as "spilled eyes") that is displayed when a role is dropped is referred to as a "pattern symbol" and has pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, at the time of replay duplicate winning (winning of the replay B group and the replay C group), different symbol combinations are stopped and displayed depending on the pressing order of the stop switch, but no dropout occurs at the time of the replay winning (“PB=1 described later”). )).
In this case, a combination of symbols that is advantageous to the player, for example, a combination of symbols that shifts to an RT with a higher replay winning probability, or a combination of symbols that maintains an RT with a higher replay winning probability, is displayed in a stop order of "correct answer". It is called "push order" or "promotion push order".
On the other hand, the push order in which the combination of symbols that shifts from an RT that is advantageous to the player (for example, an RT with a high replay winning probability) to an unfavorable RT (for example, an RT with a low replay winning probability) is displayed as "incorrect answer" Pushing order" or "falling (demotion) pushing order".

The “instruction function” means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-mentioned “advantageous operation mode” to the player.
In other words, "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, if the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates winning of a small win, the "instruction function" displays the correct answer push order for winning the correct answer push order (higher bell) when the push order bell is won. It does not include displaying the correct answer push order for winning the advantageous replay (replay for shifting to the advantageous RT or replay for maintaining the advantageous RT) at the time of duplicate re-winning.

In the following embodiments, the “instruction function” refers to a function for displaying the “advantageous operation mode” to the player, and the “operation of the instruction function” indicates that the correct answer push order is displayed when the push order bell is won. , And replays are used in the sense of including both the correct answer pushing order that wins the advantageous replays at the time of winning.
Note that showing the contents of the "instruction" to the player is "display", and notifying the contents of the instruction to the player is "notification". Therefore, the “instruction function” is both a “display function” and a “notification function”.
Further, the “instruction” is a concept having the meaning of “instruction”, but no penalty is imposed on the player just because he/she does not follow the “instruction”. However, if the correct answer push order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not followed, the higher order bell may not be won when the push order bell is won, or a disadvantageous replay may be won when the replay duplicate is won.

Further, the "instruction function operation game" is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (small win B group, small win C group, replay B group, replay C) Group)), which is a game in which the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the instruction function operation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may also be referred to as a notification game.
Further, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, when the instruction function is not activated, the game is not the instruction function operation game.

In the present embodiment, the “gaming section” includes a “normal section”, a “standby section”, and an “advantageous section”.
First, the “normal section” is a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a push order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described later on a peripheral board (for example, sub-control). It is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted to the board) and that does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (does not activate the instruction function). However, in addition to the lottery for the condition device (role), it is possible to make a decision (lottery or the like) as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.
Since the instruction function must not be operated in the normal section, the pressing order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board, and the instruction function cannot be displayed. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by the image display device electrically connected to the sub-control board described later.

When determining the shift to the advantageous zone in the normal section, it is necessary to make the shift determination in association (linking) with the selected condition device.
Here, the decision to move to the advantageous section in association with the selected condition device means that the condition device is selected at the same time when it is determined whether or not to move to the advantageous section, and that a specific condition device is won. There may be a case where a lottery is separately conducted to decide whether or not to shift to the advantageous section on the condition of.

In the present embodiment, it is set to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section at the same time as the lottery of the condition device. Further, the length (number of games) of the advantageous section to be determined (winning) differs depending on the winning condition device. For example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when winning 1BB described later, it becomes the advantageous section of 50 games counting from the end of the 1BB game as an initial value, and when a small win E1 is independently won. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it may be the advantageous section for executing only one instruction function operation game (excluding games that have won small group C group, replay B group, replay C group) is there.

Furthermore, in determining the shift to the advantageous zone in association with the winning condition device, a condition device that can decide to shift to the advantageous zone (in the case of performing a lottery for separately whether to shift to the advantageous zone The condition device that is a condition for performing the lottery is set so that the condition device is a condition device that does not have a difference in winning probability.
Here, the "set value" defines the degree of advantage of the player, and the higher (or lower) the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the expected value of the payout is. ) It is set. The set value is provided in six stages of, for example, setting 1 to setting 6.
The "condition device having no difference in win probability (common to settings)" refers to a condition device having the same win probability in all settings.

In addition, it is only possible to determine the transition to the advantageous interval in association with the winning of the condition device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, and only when it is possible to win the condition device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability. However, this does not mean that it is necessary to always shift to the advantageous zone or to always perform the lottery for shifting to the advantageous zone. Of course, it is also possible not to make any decision regarding the advantageous section even when the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability is won.

On the other hand, “a condition device having a difference in winning probabilities (by setting)” means that the winning probabilities are not the same in all settings. For example, if the winning probabilities of all the setting values are different, or if the winning probabilities of some of the setting values are different from the winning probabilities of some of the other setting values (for example, the winning probabilities of setting 1 to setting 5). Is “x”, and the winning probability of the setting 6 is “y (≠x)”).

Further, the "advantageous section" is a game section having the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be operated), and specifically, when the instruction function is operated, the instruction content in the main control board Only when displaying the push order instruction information so that the (advantageous operation mode) can be identified, it indicates a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub control board. The game in the advantageous section may be referred to as a notificationable game. On the contrary, the game in the normal section or the game in the standby section may be referred to as an unnotifiable game.
However, the sub control board cannot output the effect contrary to the content of the instruction given by the main control board or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Then, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the maximum payout number (“9”) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game (when the accessory is not operated) capable of executing the instruction function operation game can be acquired. At least one game or more is performed to instruct the operation mode of the stop switch in which the winning combination (small winning combination 01) related to the maximum payout number is won in the winning game of the condition device (small winning combination B group) having an advantageous operating mode. It is necessary.

Specifically, in this embodiment, a small winning combination B group and a small winning combination C group are provided as so-called push-order bell condition devices.
In the small role B group, a small role 01, which is a 9-card role, always wins when the answer is correct in the push order, and a single-card role can be won (may be missed) when the answer is incorrect in the push order.
On the other hand, in the small role C group, the small role 02, which is a three-role combination, always wins when the correct answer is in the pushing order, and the one-role combination always wins when the incorrect answer is in the pushing order.

And, the game when executing the instruction function operation game is a non-operation of the accessory (normal game), and the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is "3".
Furthermore, the maximum payout number when the prescribed number is "3" is "9" (at the time of winning the small prize 01).
Therefore, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, by operating the instruction function at the time of winning the condition device (small winning combination B group) in which the small winning combination 01 can win, the correct answer order for winning the small winning combination 01 is set. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

Further, during the advantageous section, in a game in which a condition device having an advantageous operation mode is won, the instruction function may always be activated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, in the advantageous section, even if the game wins the condition device having an advantageous operation mode, the instruction function may not be activated.

Furthermore, the “stand-by section” refers to a game section when it has been decided to shift to the advantageous section and has not yet shifted to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal section may be shifted to the advantageous section, the normal section may be shifted to the standby section, and further, the standby section may be shifted to the advantageous section. It should be noted that it is not possible to shift from the advantageous zone to the standby zone, and after the advantageous zone is completed, it always shifts to the normal zone. The waiting section can be moved only when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device in which the winning information includes the special role that can be carried over after the next game, and it corresponds to the special role. In a game in which a combination of symbols is displayed, it must be finished. Of course, it may be finished before the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is displayed.
Further, in the standby section, it is not possible to activate the instruction function in the main control board or send a signal related to the instruction function to the sub control board. When the instruction function is operated in the main control board and the signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub control board, it is a condition that the advantageous period is in effect.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, one case of executing an instruction function operation game (excluding a small winning group C, a replay B group, a game won in the replay C group) and a case of executing a predetermined number of games. Have.
In the advantageous section in which the game is executed a predetermined number of times, when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically operated.
In addition, the end condition of the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above, for example, to end (puncture) lottery at a predetermined timing, and to end the advantageous section when winning this lottery, etc. May be.

Alternatively, only by shifting to the advantageous section, the execution condition of the instruction function operation game is not satisfied, and on the condition that it is in the advantageous section, it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game, When it is decided to execute the instruction function operation game, it is possible to execute the instruction function operation game until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
Further, during the advantageous section, it is determined (lottery, etc.) whether or not to add (add) the number of (remaining) games in the advantageous section.
Further, in the advantageous section, the upper limit number of games is set, and when the upper limit number of games is reached, the advantageous section is always ended at that point even if it has the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (limiter). Operation), shift to the normal section.

Furthermore, when the maximum number of games is reached, even if the condition device (small winning combination B group) having an advantageous operation mode that can obtain the maximum payout number (“9”) has not been won or won However, even if the winning combination of the maximum payout number (small win 01) does not instruct the operation mode of the stop switch even once, the advantageous section is always ended at that point (the limiter is activated), Move to the section.

Although the contents partially overlap with the above, the advantageous section in the present embodiment is defined as follows.
a) In the normal section, the lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (even when it is determined at the same time as the lottery of the condition device) must be associated with the condition device having no setting difference. That is, the transition probability to the advantageous zone should not differ depending on the set value.
b) In the additional lottery of the advantageous section (even when the lottery is decided without performing the lottery), the set value should not be referred to. When adding an advantageous section based on the elected condition device, it must be linked to the condition device having no setting difference.

c) Special part in normal section (means a special part that carries over the winning. The same applies to the following in this paragraph.) During the inside or during the operation of the special part, the transition lottery of the advantageous section (may be decided simultaneously with the lottery of the condition device) ) Should not be done. In addition, inside the special role, even during the advantageous section, no additional lottery (may be decided without performing the lottery) is performed in addition to the advantageous section. Furthermore, when a condition device with a setting difference that includes a special winning combination is won in the advantageous section and the special winning combination is in operation, an additional lottery is added to the advantageous section during the special winning combination (decision is not made Don't go)
Here, conventionally, it was common to perform AT lottery even after being inside, so even if it is inside, waiting for the AT win while keeping inside inside without winning a special role It was possible. However, recently, it is desirable that the AT lottery is not conducted internally. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the special part is won in the normal section and the inside is inside, it is determined that the normal section should not shift to the advantageous section inside. Furthermore, if a special part is won in the advantageous zone and it is inside, it is stipulated that the advantageous zone cannot be added in the inside.

d) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone, as a general rule, the game is shifted to the advantageous zone from the next game, and until the advantageous zone starts (in the present embodiment, it is assumed that betting for the next game becomes possible. ), it is necessary to display to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game (lighting of a lamp indicating the advantageous section, etc.).
Here, conventionally, when an AT is won, it is common to consume a certain number of games (via a sign) until the player is notified of the AT winning after the AT is won. It was Also, for example, when an AT is drawn based on the winning of a rare role, if the player loses the rare role in the game, the player has won the rare role and that the AT is drawn based on the rare role. Since I do not know, even if I win the AT by winning the rare role, I sometimes stopped playing before being notified of the AT winning. After that, when another person plays a game on the table, there is a problem that the other person may enjoy the benefit of the AT (previous player has assigned). However, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as a general rule, it is displayed that it is the advantageous section from the next game until the advantageous section starts (in the present embodiment, the bet of the next game becomes possible). Therefore, the above problem does not occur.
As described above, in the related art, the AT winning is notified after the AT is won (particularly after the AT is passed), but in the present embodiment, as a general rule, it is possible to bet the next game. The difference is that the advantageous zone is displayed before the advantageous zone is started.
Further, the conventional notification of the AT winning has been performed only as a part of the production, but the player is informed of the advantageous section from the next game in the present embodiment (a lamp indicating the advantageous section. Lighting) is performed in order to solve the above problem.

In addition, the advantageous section ratio refers to a rate of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all game sections (normal section+standby section+advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games in the advantageous section during that time is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Note that, as will be described later, the advantageous section ratio is displayed in the present embodiment, but the displayed advantageous section ratio is a numerical value obtained by rounding down the decimal point as a result of the calculation.

The pull-in rate (PB) is the probability that the desired symbol that you want to stop on the effective line can be stopped on the effective line from the moment you operate the stop switch until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). Show.
Then, if the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line (up to the effective line). Inability to pull in is referred to as “PB (pulling rate)≠1”.
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) on the effective line. =1”.

Then, "PB=1" has a case where all reels are in such a combination and a case where only a specific (a part of) reel is in that combination.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to "4", and when the target symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, "PB=1" and the number exceeds 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When arranged at intervals, “PB≠1”. In particular, the number of symbols of the reel of the present embodiment is set to "20", and if four symbols are arranged at an interval of 5 symbols, the symbol becomes "PB=1".

"N-1" game item, "N" game item, "N+1" game item, ... ("N" is an integer greater than or equal to 2) When the game progresses, the current game is "N" game When it is an eye, the "N" game eye game is called a "current game". Further, the game of the "N-1" game is referred to as "previous game".
On the other hand, the game of the "N+1" game is called "next game".

The "ball payout rate" is a value calculated by the expected value of the number of paid out medals/the number of inserted medals. When "1", the current state is maintained, and when "1" is exceeded, the number of medals increases. This is the state, and when it is less than “1”, the number of medals is reduced.
The "expected value of the number of paid-out medals" is calculated by the sum of "probability of winning a winning combination x number of payouts" for all winning combinations in the game.

Furthermore, the “difference number of coins” is a value calculated by “the number of medals paid out (the number of medals actually paid out or the expected number of medals paid out)−the number of inserted medals”. When the number of inserted medals is “3” and the number of paid-out medals (expected value) is “3”, the difference is “±0”, and when the number of paid-out medals (expected value) exceeds “3”, When the difference number exceeds “0” and the medal payout number (expected value) is less than “3”, the difference number is less than “0”.

“Bet” means betting a medal (game medium) for playing a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets that can be played (specified number) is set to 3 when the accessory is not operated (during a normal game). On the other hand, while the accessory (1BB) is operating, the number of bettable numbers (specified number) that can be played is set to two. In order to bet medals, an actual medal is maintained and inserted from the medal insertion slot, or the bet switch is operated to bet the stored medals.
Although the "gaming medium" is a medal in this embodiment, electronic information is used as the gaming medium in the case of, for example, an enclosed game machine. The "electronic information" means, for example, when money (banknotes) is put into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played on a gaming machine. It can be stored in a game machine as a game medium for performing.
In addition, since the display of character ratios and the like described later can be applied not only to slot machines but also to ball game machines, "gaming media" include not only medals but also game balls. Be done.

Unlike the above-mentioned "bet", "to store" means to credit a medal inside the slot machine 10. The term "reservation" may be used to include a bet, but in the present specification, the term "reservation" is used to include a "bet". In this embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of sheets that can be stored is set to "50" regardless of the game state or the like. When a small role wins and the medals are paid out, the medals are stored. Further, in the case where the medals have been care-inserted from the medal insertion slot and the maximum number has already been bet, the inserted medals are stored. Therefore, when a medal is care-inserted from the medal insertion slot, there are cases of betting and cases of betting.

It should be noted that the slot machine 10 “paying out” the medals to the player is equivalent to the player “acquiring” the medals. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, the payout of medals is made, and from the viewpoint of the player side, the medal is obtained. Therefore, there is a case where it is referred to as “payout (number of sheets)” (for example, the payout means 67) and a case where it is referred to as “acquisition (number of sheets)” (for example, the acquired number display LED 78), but both have the same meaning.

In this specification, a numerical value with "B" added to the end (especially, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value with "H" added to the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in binary and "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. In addition, a numerical value that means a decimal number is expressed as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear which is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the trailing symbols of “B”, “D”, and “H” may be omitted.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (which does not mean to include only those shown in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progression including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit for inputting signals such as operation switches, and the output port 52 is a connection unit for transmitting signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, a peripheral device for input is indicated by an arrow indicating a signal from the peripheral device toward the main control board 50, and a peripheral device for output is indicated by an arrow directed from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (similar to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game and the like. Data necessary for displaying management information described later (total number of games, etc.) is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (for example, a data table) necessary for the progress of the game.

The main CPU 55 refers to the CPU provided on the main control board 50, and executes the programs necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, etc. Specifically, the lottery of the winning combination, the drive control of the reels 31, and the winning The payout, etc. are executed.
The main CPU 55 has a built-in register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality (for example, A register to L register, transmission register, etc.) are provided.

An MPU including a RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. It should be noted that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside, in addition to the one mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including a RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the MPU, instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are sent inside the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and an input sensor 44 (but is not limited to these), and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, the passage sensor 43a first detects the medal.

Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for allowing/not allowing the insertion of medals. When the insertion of medals is not allowed, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion opening 43 from the payout opening. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion opening 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

Here, in the blocker 45, during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all reels 31 are stopped and the payout corresponding to the winning combination is finished at the time of winning the winning combination), the insertion of medals is not permitted. To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when the game is not being played.

An input sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. Therefore, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is configured to be further detected by the insertion sensor 44 after being detected by the passage sensor 43a.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the main control board 50, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 46 are electrically operated as operation switches operated by the player. Connected to each other.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting a stored medal for the present game. In this embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum or prescribed number) medals are provided.
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two-bed bet may be provided.

Further, the prescribed number of the present embodiment is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated and 2 when the accessory is activated, but when the 1 bet switch 40a is operated (pressed) twice, two medals are obtained. Can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted by operating (pressing) three times. Further, while the accessory is operating, by operating the 3-bet switch 40b, it is possible to insert two medals (a prescribed number) at a time.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31, and are switches operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reels 31.
Furthermore, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals betted and/or accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In addition, in practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. In FIG. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed therebetween.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other separate boards (relay boards, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

On the display substrate 75, a stored number display LED 76, an advantageous section display LED 77, and an acquired number display LED 78 are mounted. These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided in the vicinity of operation switches operated by the player, and are provided at positions where the player can always visually recognize them. It is not necessary that all the LEDs 76 to 78 be provided on one display substrate 75, and a plurality of display substrates 75 such as the display substrates 75A, 75B,... Any of the LEDs 76 to 78 may be provided.

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the accumulated number display LED 76, the advantageous zone display LED 77, the acquired number display LED 78, the settlement switch 46, the 1 bet switch 40a, and the 3 bet switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. It is a top view.
Further, in FIG. 2, a display board 75 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is arranged inside the slot machine 10 below the accumulated number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, and the acquired number display LED 78. ing.

The stored number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of a digit 1 that displays the upper digit and a digit 2 that displays the lower digit. That is, the stored number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, the "digit" means a display unit (display), and in particular, in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment) and a segment DP (decimal point; dot-shaped LED for displaying a decimal point). Has been done.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 2, the number of digits mounted on the display substrate 75 is four, that is, the digits 1 to 4, but in the present embodiment, there are nine digits, and the other digits are the main control board. It is mounted on the 60 (details will be described later).

The stored number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in the present embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (an integer).
For example, when no medals have been bet and stored, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is "00". Here, when one medal is taken care of, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more coins are additionally inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the prescribed number is three). Therefore, when the number of medals that have been maintained is three, the medals are bet and are not stored. When the medals are further maintained, the medals are stored inside the slot machine 10 and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to store up to 50 medals. Therefore, when the number of stored sheets reaches 50 (when "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), no more medals are stored. In this state, if the medals are trimmed through the medal insertion slot 43, the blocker 45 returns the trimmed medals through the payout slot.

Here, when a winning combination (excluding replays) with a medal payout is won and a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out, the inside of the slot machine 10 has priority over the actual payout of the medal from the payout opening. Medals are stored. For example, when the number of stored coins before winning the winning combination is “10” and the winning combination of 9 coins is won, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is updated from “10” to “19”.

Furthermore, when the number of stored sheets exceeds “50” at the time of winning the winning combination, the portion exceeding “50” is actually paid out from the payout opening. For example, when the number of stored coins is “47” before the winning of the winning combination and 9 medals are paid out by winning the winning combination of nine winning combinations, three are stored and the number of accumulated coins is “50”, which exceeds “50”. 6 sheets will be paid out from the payout port.

Further, at the time of winning the replay, the medals are not stored and paid out, and the number of medals bet in the game is automatically bet for the replay. For example, the game is played with 3 bets (3), and when a replay is won, 3 medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the winning of the replay is the insertion of the medal for performing the replay, the medal cannot be settled even if the settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter.

In addition, "Rules regarding the approval of gaming machines and type verification (hereinafter simply referred to as "rules")" states that when a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay is stopped on the active line, the condition device relating to the replay is It is understood to be working and not a "winning prize." However, in the present application (this specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combination), and the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay is stopped on the activated line is referred to as "replay winning".

Further, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is configured by the segment DP of the digit 2. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be in the off state in the normal section and the standby section, but is controlled to be in the lit state during the advantageous section. Therefore, the player can determine at a glance whether or not he/she is currently staying in the advantageous zone by confirming whether the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on or off.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is located near the settlement switch 46. Therefore, when the player finishes the game and has a stored medal (for example, when the stored number display LED 76 displays “10”), he/she operates the settlement switch 46. At that time, It can be easily confirmed from the off state of the advantageous zone display LED 77 that the vehicle is not in the advantageous zone. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, as a general rule, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the adjustment switch 46 can be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game against the intention of the player even during the advantageous period (or the advantageous period from the next game).

Furthermore, the number-of-wins display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of players acquired) at the time of winning the winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 that displays the upper digit and a digit 4 that displays the lower digit. ing. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays two digits like the stored number display LED 76.
The number-of-wins display LED 78 is displayed as “00” when there are no medals to be paid out. For example, when nine medals to be described later are won and nine medals are paid out, the number-of-wins display LED 78 is displayed as follows. It changes from "00" to "09".
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as "0".

The acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the acquired number, but when an error occurs, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, the acquired number display LED 78 displays an error number “dE”.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays an advantageous operation mode (push order instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves as a display of the acquired number, the error content, and an advantageous operation mode due to the operation of the instruction function. It should be noted that the notification of the advantageous pressing order when the instruction function is activated is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub control board 80.

Here, in the present specification, the display of the push order using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50 is referred to as “operation of the instruction function”, and the display of the push order by the sub control board 80 is “notification of the push order”. Called.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20, which will be described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous pressing order is referred to as a “pushing order instruction number”.
Further, information on the pressing order displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the pointing function, for example, information such as “=1” in FIG. 20, is referred to as “pressing order instruction information”. That is, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. In FIG. 3, (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
The main control board 50 is housed and sealed in the transparent board case 16 for security reasons. The main control board 50 cannot be accessed (the board case 16 cannot be opened) without breaking the caulked portion 16a of the board case 16. Note that, in FIG. 3, the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is illustrated so as to be seen through the board case 16 without being blocked. The caulking portion 16a may also be referred to as a sealing member.

On the board case 16, stickers indicating the authenticity of the main control board 50, the serial number, the opening record of the caulking portion 16a, and the like are attached, but the visibility may be obstructed by these stickers. Digits 5-9 are mounted on the main control board 50 so that they are not present.
The digit 5 is a set value display LED 73, and is an LED that displays the current set value when confirming or changing the setting. The set value display LED 73 does not necessarily have to be mounted on the main control board 50, and can also be used as the back side of the front door, the stored number display LED 76, or the acquired number display LED 78, for example.

The digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74. In order to ensure the visibility of the management information display LED 74, for example, one digit housing is shown in FIG.
It is preferable to design the width m1×the vertical width n≧36 mm 2. Alternatively, if the management information display LED 74 is one horizontally long (horizontal width m2) digit housing,
It is preferable to design the width m2×the vertical width n/4 (the number of digits)≧36 mm 2.

In FIG. 3, in the example 1 of (a), the number of the main control board 50 is one, but not limited to this, as in the example 2 of (b), the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards. However, the boards may be connected by a harness or the like. However, even if the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards, it is necessary to house the whole body in the board case 16 and seal it.
In the example of FIG. 3B, the main control board 50 is two main control boards 50A and 50B, connectors are provided on the main control boards 50A and 50B, and the connectors are connected by a harness. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector that can directly connect the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used and a harness may not be used (the same applies to FIG. 42B described later).
The set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, but the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B also serves as a display board for mounting the management information display LED 74.

Further, the management information display LED 74 has, for example, the digits 6 and 7 arranged in the upper one row as in the case 2 of the example (b), in addition to the case of the horizontal one row as shown in the example 1 of (a). , The digits 8 and 9 may be arranged in the lower row.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship among the digits 1 to 9, the segments A to G, and the segment DP.
As described above, each digit is composed of seven rod-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP, and the segments A to G (seven) constitute a so-called 7-segment. ..

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, in the digit 1, the segments A to G form 7 segments of the upper digit of the stored number display LED 76, and the segment DP is unused.
In addition, among the digits 2, the segments A to G compose 7 segments of the lower digit of the stored number display LED 76, and the segment DP is used as the advantageous section display LED 77.
Furthermore, the segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 respectively form 7-segments of the upper digit and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78, and the segment DP is unused.

Further, in the digit 5, the segments A to G compose 7-segments of the set value display LED 73, and the segment DP becomes an LED that lights up during the setting change. That is, among the set value display LEDs 73, when only 7 segments are lit, the setting is being confirmed, and when 7 segments and the segment DP are lit, the setting is being changed. The segment DP of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during the setting change.

The segments 6 to 9 constitute the management information display LED 74, and the segments 6 and 7 display the information type of the management information. Further, the segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in the segments 6 and 7 of the management information. The segment DP of the digits 6 to 9 is unused. However, when the management information display LED 74 is turned on, the segment DP of the digit 7 can be turned on. Further, by lighting the segment DP of the digit 7, the boundary between the digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and the digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical value can be clarified and the confirmation can be facilitated.

Further, FIG. 4 shows a configuration diagram of segment data. For example, when the digit 1 is displayed as "0", the segments A to F are turned on and the segments G and DP are turned off, so that the segment data is "00111111(B)".
Further, when the digit 2 is displayed as "1" and the segment is in the advantageous section, the segments B, C, and DP are turned on, so that the segment data becomes "10000110(B)". That is, by setting the most significant bit (8th bit) of the digit 2 segment data to "0" or "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or turned on. Thus, by determining whether the 8th bit of the digit data of the digit 2 is "0" or "1", it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the motor 32 and the like of the symbol display device.
The symbol display device includes reels (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, motors 32 that drive the respective reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reels 31.

The motor 32 is for rotating the reel 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape having a plurality of types of symbols (symbols forming a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination) printed thereon is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index (may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated once, or the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment of detecting the index can be detected.

A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for accumulating medals, a hopper motor 36 that drives the hopper 35 when paying out medals from a payout opening, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. The sensor 37 is provided.

Medals received from the medal insertion slot 43 and received are formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a “shoot section”).
The payout sensor 37 is a pair of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined distance, and is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has elapsed after the medal was detected by one payout sensor 37. Has been done. Then, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly paid out, based on the timings at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on/off.

For example, when the signals of both payout sensors 37 are off even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected. To be done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that the medal clogging has occurred.

The power switch 11 is a switch for turning on/off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated 90 degrees (clockwise) to the right, and is turned on when confirming the setting or changing the setting.

The setting switch 13 is a switch operated when changing a set value. For example, the set value is incremented by "1" each time the operation is performed once while the setting is being changed. In the present embodiment, the setting values are from setting 1 to setting 6, and while the setting is being changed, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the setting value is changed from “1”→“2”→...→“6”→ It switches to "1"→... It should be noted that any of the set values is displayed during the setting change, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed set value is confirmed.

When the power switch 11 is turned on while this switch is turned on, the reset switch 14 is reset, that is, initialized, and the predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
The door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when a front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and is for detecting the open/closed state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external centralized terminal board 100 is output from a part of the output port 52.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external centralized terminal board 100. In the present embodiment, an external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous zone signal), an external signal indicating that an error occurred in the slot machine 10 or a power failure has occurred, or the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is indicated. An external signal, a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, etc. are provided.

In FIG. 1, a sub-control board 80 controls selection and output of effects (information) during a game and a game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected to each other, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71 described later) is unidirectional to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control command) necessary for production output.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to be electrically connected, and may be a connection using an optical communication unit. Furthermore, both electrical connection and optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used together.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, a RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Peripheral devices for production such as the following production lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for performance are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing the data and the like taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
In addition, the ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores, as the effect data, a program for performing a lottery related to the effect, various data, and the like.

The effect lamp 21 is composed of, for example, an LED, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect lamp 21 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and is a back lamp for illuminating the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols vertically visible from the display window 17) from behind, the reel 31. Includes a fluorescent lamp that illuminates the symbols on the reel 31 from above, and a frame lamp that is arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when winning a winning combination.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effect images (correct answer pressing order, effect corresponding to the lottery result of the condition device, etc.) during the game, The game information (the number of games played, the number of games acquired, etc., during operation of the accessory or in the advantageous section) is displayed.
In addition, the cross key 24 and the menu button 25 are used to display information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code that is the player's game history), and the hall manager (store manager, etc.) changes various settings. It is used when doing.

Next, the combination of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols and the like will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a symbol array of the reel 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the symbol numbers are also shown. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol with the symbol number 0 is "bell A".
As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In the figure, "blank" does not mean that the symbol is not displayed at all, but a predetermined symbol corresponding to the "blank" is displayed.
The "bell A", "bell B", and "bell C" are similar in appearance, but different from each other.

Further, FIG. 6A shows a positional relationship between a display window (transparent window) 17 provided on a front door (front door, not shown) of the slot machine 10, each reel 31, and an effective line (of a symbol). And a display line for displaying a combination).
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the lateral direction. Furthermore, the reels 31 are arranged so that three symbols that are vertically continuous can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (frames) are arranged so that they can be seen from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10. In addition, the lower right number of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

Further, FIG. 6(B) illustrates the designation of symbol positions in this specification. In the present specification, the symbol positions when stopped from the display window 17 for each reel 31 are referred to as “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” in order from the top. ," middle left stage" and "lower left stage".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6(A), effective lines are set for the nine symbols visible from the display window 17.

Here, the "effective line" is a line of symbols arranged when the reel 31 is stopped, a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a symbol combination, and a symbol corresponding to one of the winning combinations. This is the line that wins the winning combination when the combination stops at that line. In the present embodiment, one effective line (a straight line passing through "lower left"-"middle middle"-"upper right") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. There is.

The invalid line is a line that is not set as a valid line in the symbol combination line, and even if the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination stops in that line, the profit is awarded according to that winning combination. This line does not perform (medal payout, etc.). That is, the invalid line is a line that is not the target of the establishment of the symbol combination in the first place.

In addition, conventionally, there is known a slot machine in which the number of effective lines varies depending on the number of inserted medals. For example, when the number of inserted medals is 1, the number of activated lines is set to 1, when the number of inserted medals is 2, the number of activated lines is set to 3, and when the number of inserted medals is 3, the number of activated lines is set to 5. There are things to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play a game, and in all games, one shown in FIG. 6(A) becomes an effective line, There is no change in the number of active lines depending on the number of medals inserted. Therefore, in this specification, the term “effective line” refers to the line shown in FIG.

FIG. 7 to FIG. 12 are views showing combinations of types of winning combinations (winning combinations included in a condition device that is randomly selected by the winning combination lottery unit 61 described later), payout numbers, and symbols. Note that FIG. 12 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 (number "101" to as a combination of symbols displayed at the time of missing the winning symbol in the case of winning a specific condition device, although it is not a symbol. "120").

The winning combination of the present embodiment roughly includes a special winning combination, a replay (re-playing winning combination), and a small winning combination.
Then, the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts at the time of winning, and the like are set. When all reels 31 are stopped, a combination of symbols corresponding to one of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (winning combination wins. The same applies hereinafter), and the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out.
However, the number of payouts at the time of winning the special part is set to 0. In replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

In FIGS. 7 to 12, the “specified number 3” displayed in the payout number and the like indicates the payout number and the like when the specified number is 3 (the number of inserted characters when the accessory is not operated, that is, in the normal game). , “Regulated number 2” indicates the number of payouts and the like when the prescribed number is 2 (the number of inserted coins when the accessory is operated, that is, during the special game). For example, the replay 01 with the number "3" indicates that the replay is to be performed with the specified number of 3 cards, and the "-" with the specified number of 2 cards indicates that the drawing is not performed.

In FIG. 7, the numbers “1” and “2” correspond to special roles (features). In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special role is a role for shifting from the normal game to the special game.
When 1BB is won, no medals are paid out in the game this time, but the game shifts from the next game to the 1BB game corresponding to the special game (operation of the winning character).
During the 1BB game (when the role object is activated), the payout rate is set to exceed “1”, which is an advantageous game for the player, who can expect to win medals more than when the role object is not activated. ..

Further, the replay (re-play role) is a role that allows the re-play while maintaining the number of medals inserted in the game this time (automatically betting medals).
As shown in FIG. 7, the replay of the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers “3” to “13”).
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that, when a prize is won in a specific RT, the replay is switched to another RT. Therefore, these replays are also referred to as migration replays.

More specifically, when Replay 02 wins at RT2, the game is shifted from the next game to RT3 (RT which is advantageous to the player). Therefore, the replay 02 is also referred to as a promotion replay.
Further, when the replay 03 wins at RT3, the game is shifted from the next game to RT2 (RT which is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RTs). Therefore, the replay 03 is also referred to as a fall (demotion) replay.

In addition, firstly, the replays 04 and 05 are used as control replays for the purpose of making a plurality of replays win multiple wins and increasing the types of condition devices. In the present embodiment, among the condition devices described later, Replay B2, B3, C2, C3, or replay included in E. When the replay B2, B3, C2, or C3 is won, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay does not stop on the activated line.

Further, the replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rare replays and included in the replay E of the conditional device described later. When Replay E is won in the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.
Replay 06 is a replay that is randomly selected during 1BB operation and is included in Replay D of the condition device described later. When Replay D is won in the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.

Further, the small winning combination includes small winning combinations 01 to 40 (numbers "14" to "100"), as shown in FIGS. Small wins 01 and 02 are small wins (small wins corresponding to higher bells) that are won in the correct answer push order when the push order bell is won, which will be described later. In addition, the small wins 03 to 34 are small wins (small wins corresponding to the cheap bell) that can be won (PB≠1) in the wrong pressing order when the push order bell is won.
Furthermore, the small wins 35 to 38 are rare small wins (small wins corresponding to watermelon or cherry).
Furthermore, the small wins 39 and 40 are the small wins in which the specified number is two, that is, the winning is possible only when the accessory is activated.

As described above, the pattern patterns 01 to 03 are not the winning combination itself, but appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is non-winning) when the pressing order is incorrect when the pushing order bell is won. It is a combination of symbols. Further, the pattern design is such that when a specific RT (in this embodiment, non-RT, RT1, or RT3) combination of the designs stops on the activated line, RT is shifted (shifted to RT2 in this embodiment). It is a combination. In the present embodiment, the pattern symbols 01 to 03 are surely to appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is a non-winning prize) at the time of an incorrect answer to the pushing order at the time of winning the small winning combination B group. However, other combinations of symbols (not the winning combination itself) may appear.

In each of the above-mentioned winning combinations, when the combination of symbols corresponding to that winning combination does not stop in the active line in the winning game, the winning combination that will be carried over after the next game and the winning combination that is not carried over are defined. ..
The hand to be carried over is 1BB in the present embodiment. When 1BB is won, in the game until 1BB wins, the winning information of 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later.

On the other hand, the winning of 1BB is carried over, but small wins and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. When a small win or replay is won in the lottery of the condition device, the winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in the games winning these winning combinations, the reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combinations can be won, but at the end of the game, regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. , The right to win the winning role disappears.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals that have been stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet) or inserts medals through the medal insertion slot 43 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When this signal is received, the main control board 50 (specifically, reel control means 65 to be described later) performs the lottery of the winning combination by the winning combination lottery means 61, and controls the driving of all the motors 32 to all the reels. 31 is controlled to rotate. As the reel 31 is thus rotated by the motor 32, the symbols on the reel 31 are moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

Then, the player pushes the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, a reel control means 65 to be described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and responds to the winning lottery result of the winning lottery means 61. As described above, the stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed.

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is stopped on the activated line (when the winning combination of the winning combination is achieved), the payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role lottery means 61 and the like. The following respective means in the present embodiment are exemplifications and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of the condition device (winning combination). Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning role determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.
Further, the “winning of the condition device” is also called a winning combination lottery result, a lottery result, a winning number, a winning result, and the like.

The role lottery means 61 is based on, for example, a random number generating means (hardware random number) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting a random number generated by this random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. It is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not the condition device is won and a condition device that has been won.

The random number generation means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a counter that counts 1 at 200 n (nano) sec and continues counting as one cycle in the range of “0” to “65535”. While the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number is Keep counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the condition device corresponding to the area to which the random value belongs by collating the random number value extracted by the random number extraction device with a condition device lottery table described later. For example, when the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device number “1” (replay A), it is determined that the replay A is won.

13 to 16 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices that are selected by the combination lottery means 61 and the contents of winning combinations included in each condition device.
In the following description, the condition device will be mainly described, and details of stop control of the reel 31 based on the pushing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing when each condition device is won will be described with the reel control means 65. To do.

As described above, the condition device of the present embodiment does not carry over the winning information to the next game, and the "conditions condition device" which is a condition device that includes any of the special roles that can carry over the winning information to the next game. It consists of a "winning and replay condition device" which is a condition device that includes either a small win or a replay.
The winning of the accessory condition device corresponds to the winning of 1BB in the present embodiment, and includes the accessory condition device numbers “1” and “2”.
The accessory condition device number "0" corresponds to non-winning of the special role, the accessory condition device number "1" corresponds to winning of 1BBA, and the accessory condition device number "2" corresponds to winning of 1BBB. Equivalent to.

Further, for example, when Replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is “0”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “1”.
On the other hand, when 1BBA alone is won, the accessory condition device number is "1", and the winning and replay condition device number is "0".

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the winning combination of 1BB and the small winning combination is performed. For example, when the winning combination of 1BBA and the small winning combination D is winning, the accessory condition device number is "1", and the winning and replay condition device number. Becomes "26".
When 1BB and a small win or replay are won, the winning of the small win or replay is prioritized in this game (note that the priority can be set arbitrarily). Also, since the winning of the small role or the replay is effective only in the game this time, the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless a prize is won.

The winning and replay condition device will be described below.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to non-winning of a winning combination (so-called loss).
Further, the replay A with the condition device number “1” is a single win of the replay 01. When Replay A is elected, Replay 01 wins regardless of the pressing order.

Replays B1 to B3 of condition device numbers “2” to “4” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay B group”), replays C1 to C3 of condition device numbers “5” to “7” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay B group”). Are referred to as “replay C group”), which are duplicate wins of a plurality of types of replays, and are duplicate wins including at least one of replay 01 or 02. The type of replay to be won is set to be different depending on the order of pressing the stop switch 42.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number “2”, the replay 02 wins in the pushing order of the left first stop, and the replay 01 wins at a time other than the left first stop (middle or right first stop).

It should be noted that in the case of replay duplicate winning, since the replay (re-playing combination) is won regardless of the pushing order, there is no high/low concept of payout of medals or the like. However, for example, when the player wins the replay B1 at RT2, the RT is promoted (shifted from RT2 to RT3) by winning the replay 02 at the left first stop. On the other hand, except for the first stop on the left, RT2 is maintained by winning the replay 01.
Further, when the replay C1 is won at RT3, the RT3 is maintained by winning the replay 01 at the left first stop. On the other hand, except for the first stop on the left side, the replay 03 is won to cause the RT to fall (degrade) (shift from RT3 to RT2).

Replay D of the condition device number “8” is a single winning of Replay 06. When Replay D is won, Replay 06 will be awarded regardless of the pressing order.
Similarly, the replay E of the condition device number “9” is a duplicate win of the replays 04 and 05. When Replay E is won, Replay 04 or 05 will be awarded regardless of the pressing order. These replays 04 and 05 serve as rare replays. In particular, in the present embodiment, if the replay E is won during the RT1 and the advantageous section during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. It should be noted that the addition may not always be executed, but the addition lottery may be performed.

In FIG. 14, the small winning combination A having the condition device number “10” is a so-called common bell and is a single winning of the small winning combination 01. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins (PB=1) regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.
14 to 15, small wins B1 to B12 (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "small win B group") having condition device numbers "11" to "22" correspond to so-called push order bells. , A small winning combination 01 (9 bells, 9 winning combinations) and at least one of small winning combinations 03 to 34 (single winning combinations).

At the time of winning these condition devices, depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when it is the correct pressing order, a small win 01 which is a high-rank bell (9 bells, 9 wins) is won at “PB=1”. On the other hand, when it is in the wrong pressing order, the small win 03 which is a cheap bell (single hand role) depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated). There are cases in which ~34 wins, and cases in which none of the small wins wins (when pattern patterns are displayed due to spillage).

In FIG. 16, the small wins C1 to C3 (hereinafter collectively referred to as the “small win C group”) of the condition device numbers “23” to “25” are so-called pushes, like the small win B group. This is a double win, which corresponds to a regular bell and includes small win 02 (3 bells, 3 wins) and small wins 03 to 10 (1 win).
At the time of winning these condition devices, depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 42, if it is the correct pressing order, the small win 02 which is a higher bell (3 bells, 3 wins) wins with "PB=1". On the other hand, in the case of the incorrect pressing order, one of the small wins 03 to 10, which is the cheap bell (single hand), wins with “PB=1”. Therefore, at the time of winning the small winning combination C group, unlike the case of winning the small winning combination B group, there is no case where the pattern design is displayed (missing). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a case where no small winning combination is won.

At the time of winning the small role B group, 9 coins will be paid out when the higher bell is won, so when the correct answer is the push order, 3 ins (the number of coins inserted) and 9 outs (the number of coins coined out) will result. The number of sheets is “+6”. Therefore, it is a condition device in which the number of medals increases when the answer is correct in the pushing order, and decreases when the answer is incorrect in the pushing order (the payout number is 1 or 0).
On the other hand, in the small role group C, three coins are paid out when the high-rank bell is won, so when the answer is correct in the push order, three ins (the number of coins inserted) and three outs (the number of coins coined out) will be paid out. The difference in number is "±0". Therefore, when the pushing order is correct, the number of medals is maintained as it is, and when the pushing order is incorrect (the payout number is 1), the number of medals is reduced.

As described above, the reason why both the pushing order bell that pays out 9 pieces and the pushing order bell that pays out 3 pieces in the correct answer pushing order are provided is for adjusting the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, at the time of incorrect answer of the pushing order at the time of winning the small group B group, the probability that one winning combination is won is 25%, and the other 75% is a pattern design. Is set to be displayed (no payout when the pattern design is displayed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, in the case of a wrong answer in the pushing order when the small winning combination C group is won, one winning combination is won with “PB=1”. In this way, it is possible to set the payout rate within an appropriate range by providing two types of push-order bells in which the number of payouts differs depending on whether the push-order is correct or incorrect and the winning probability is appropriately set. become.

The small winning combination D of the condition device number “26” corresponds to a rare small winning combination (watermelon). The small winning combination D is a single winning of the small winning combination 35 and is set to "PB≠1".
Further, the small winning combination E1 having the condition device number “27” and the small winning combination E2 having the condition device number “28” correspond to the rare small winning combination (cherry), like the small winning combination D1. The small winning combination E1 is a double winning of the small winning combinations 36 and 38, and the small winning combination E2 is a double winning of the small winning combination 37 in addition to the small winning combinations 36 and 38. When winning a small role E1 or E2, two winning positions (small role 36 or 38) will be awarded regardless of the pressing order.

The small winning combination F of the condition device number “29” is a winning combination that is drawn only during the 1BB operation (during the 1BB game), and is a winning combination of the small winning combinations 01 to 39. When the small role F is won, the small role 39, which is a 10-piece role, wins with "PB=1".
The small winning combination G of the condition device number “30” is a winning combination that is drawn only during the 1BB operation (during the 1BB game), and is a single winning of the small winning combination 40. When the small role G is won, the small role 40, which is a nine-piece role, wins with "PB=1".

17 and 18 show the winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when the condition device is selected by the combination lottery means 61, and show the numbers of the accessory condition devices and the prize and replay condition devices for each RT. It is a figure. The winning probability is obtained by dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 by “65536”. For example, the number of units to be individually won for 1BBA is set to "20" and "10" (total "30") in both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the single winning probability of 1BBA is “30/65536”.

FIG. 17 is a numerical table of the condition device that is common to the settings and can be decided to shift to the advantageous zone, or that executes the addition of the advantageous zone (or can perform the additional lottery).
Here, “common to settings” means that there is no setting difference, that is, the settings 1 to 6 have the same number of units.
Then, when a condition device having common settings is won, it may be always decided to shift to the advantageous section (determined to be added during the advantageous section), or whether or not to shift to the advantageous section ( Whether or not to add during the advantageous section) may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, a condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous zone (determines to add in the advantageous zone) and a condition device that decides not to shift to the advantageous zone (decide not to add in the advantageous zone) It may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to the settings shown in FIG. 17 is provided with a condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous zone and a condition device that decides not to shift to the advantageous zone. Further, during the advantageous section, the condition device is always set to decide to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, in the normal section, “◯” means that it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and “x” means that it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. Further, in the advantageous section, “Δ” means that it is decided to add the advantageous section, and “x” means that it is decided not to add the advantageous section.
In addition, in FIG. 17, “◯” is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and “Δ” is determined to be added to the advantageous section, but not limited to this, “◯” is It may mean that a lottery may be performed on whether to shift to the advantageous zone, and “Δ” may mean that a lottery may be performed on whether to add to the advantageous zone.

Further, FIG. 18 shows a condition device that does not decide to shift to the advantageous section and does not decide to add to the advantageous section, and the number thereof.
In the present embodiment, the condition device for deciding to move to the advantageous section or to add to the advantageous section is limited to when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is elected, and the condition device shown in FIG. In the election, neither decides to move to the advantageous section, nor does it decide to add the advantageous section.
In addition, in FIG. 18, the numbers of the settings 1 and 6 are illustrated as a representative, but in practice, as described above, the setting value has six stages of settings 1 to 6, The number of each value is set.

In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB is drawn only in the non-internal area, and therefore is drawn in non-RT and RT1 to RT3. In addition, 1BBA and 1BBB have a single winning case and a double winning case with a small winning combination D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, the small winning combination D, E1 or E2 may be independently won. The condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB drawn by RT4 is treated as a single winning of the small winning combination D, E1 or E2. Therefore, the total number of individual wins of the small win D in RT4 is "580" to "585", and the total number of individual wins of the small win E1 in RT4 is "1030". The total number of individual winnings of the small winning combination E2 in RT4 is "310" to "370".
Further, 1BBB is set as a winning combination when a condition device having a setting difference is won, and it is determined to shift to an advantageous section or to add an advantageous section based on the winning of 1BBB. There is no such thing.

In addition, Replay D is drawn only during 1BB operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB ends, the process proceeds to RT1. Then, if Replay E is won in this RT1, the advantageous section is added (only during the advantageous section). Therefore, the replay E is selected only at RT1 in order to set it so that it does not appear at other RTs.
Furthermore, the small winning combinations D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is inactive, and are not selected when the accessory is active.
On the other hand, the small winning combinations F and G are not drawn when the accessory is not operated, and are selected only when the accessory is operated.

In addition, in FIG. 17, the total of the numbers of individual winnings of 1BBA is “30”, but in the present embodiment, the number of units “20” that is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the number of the advantageous section are It is divided into a numerical value of "10" which is determined not to be transferred. That is, in the case where 1BBA is independently won, if the number "20" is won, when the game is a normal zone, the advantageous zone is simultaneously won. On the other hand, in the case where 1BBA is independently won, if the player with the number "10" is won, the advantageous section is not won.

Further, when the player independently wins 1 BBA during the advantageous section, it is determined that the advantageous section is added regardless of whether the registered number is “20” or “10”.
Similarly, the total number of individual wins of the small winning combination E1 is “1000”, but in the present embodiment, the total number of “250” that is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section. It is divided into a numeral "750" which is determined not to shift to.

Not limited to this, when the individual winning number of the small role E1 is set to one unit number “1000” (not divided into the unit number “250” and the unit number “750”), and the small role E1 is won. Alternatively, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section may be determined by a separate lottery. For example, it may be determined that there is a probability of 25% to shift to the advantageous section and that there is a probability of 75% to not shift to the advantageous section. Thus, from the beginning, the number of coins that wins the advantageous zone and the number of coins that does not win the advantageous zone may be provided. A lottery (two-stage lottery) as to whether or not to perform may be performed.
Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, at RT4 (inside the inside), it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even when the winning combination D or E1 is won, when it is RT4, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added (“*3” in FIG. 17). ..

In FIG. 18, when the single winning of 1BBB and the double winning of 1BBB and the small winning combination D are both achieved, the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed. However, as will be described later, after the end of the operation of 1BBB (after the transition to RT1), an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided.
The small part E2 has a case where it wins multiple times with 1BBB and a case where it wins independently, but neither of them makes a decision on the advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, at the time of winning the small winning combination E1, both the single winning of the small winning combination E1 and the overlapping winning with 1BBA may be determined regarding the advantageous section.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the condition devices of the replay A group, the replay B group, and the replay C group have common settings, but are not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and are added during the advantageous section. I don't decide.
However, it is not limited to the example of FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, and when these replay condition devices are elected, it is determined to shift to an advantageous section (including a lottery) or to add an advantageous section (including a lottery. ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group, the numbers are slightly different between the setting 1 and the setting 6 (for example, different by “1”), the replay A, the replay B group, Alternatively, the replay C group may be set separately.

In FIG. 18, Replay A is drawn at all RTs when the accessory is not in operation. In addition, the replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, the replay C group is drawn only at RT3. The small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group have the same setting difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6, but have the same number in all RTs.

In addition, as shown in the table of “special combination and small combination” in FIG. 18, in the setting 1 and the setting 6, the probability of winning 1BB and the small combination is set higher in the setting 6. Therefore, in this respect, the setting 6 is more advantageous than the setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the table of "replay", the winning probability of replay is highest at RT3. Then, in the advantageous section, since it is basically set to stay at RT3, not only the medal is increased by the operation of the instruction function at the time of pushing the bell but also the reduction of the medal is reduced due to the replay winning, resulting in a gaming state. ..

Further, the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group are all set as condition devices having a setting difference. Here, the numerical difference between the setting 1 and setting 6 of the small winning combination A is “250”, and the numerical difference between the setting 1 and setting 6 of the small winning combination B group (overall) is “240 (20×12)”. It is. Therefore, the small winning combination A has a larger number difference than the small winning combination B group. As a result, by setting a larger value for the number of small winning combinations A having no prize difference depending on the pressing order, it is possible to reliably provide a difference in the payout rate according to the set value.
In addition, since the combination of symbols that can be won when winning the small role A and the combination of symbols that can be won when pressing the correct answer at the time of winning the small group B group are set to be the same (described later), small role A It is not possible to infer the set value by counting the number of winnings (winning prizes).

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small winning combination B group is set higher than the probability of winning the small winning combination C group. Here, the maximum payout number when the specified number is 3 is 9, and during the advantageous section, the payout number is 9 (the maximum payout number when the specified number is 3) and at least one instruction function operation game is performed. Need to be run twice. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once when the small winning combination B group is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small winning group B higher than the winning probability of the small winning group C, one instruction function operation game (small winning group C, replay B group, replay C group winning) It is possible to reduce the expected value of the number of games in the advantageous section which is ended only by (excluding the played games). Further, even though the advantageous section is ended by executing the game a predetermined number of times, since the small win B group is not won once during the predetermined number of times, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the advantageous section cannot be ended. be able to.

The description returns to FIG.
The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination, based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each winning combination for all winning combinations. When any of the condition devices has been won in the lottery by the hand lottery means 61, the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

For example, in the non-internal middle game, when the replay B1 is won, the two win flags of the replay 01 and the replay 02 included in the condition device are turned on, and the win flags of the other combinations are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-internal medium game, when the small win B1 is won, the small win 01, the small win 03, the small win 10, the small win 11, the small win 18, the small win 19, and the small win included in the condition device. The seven winning flags of the winning combination 26 are turned on, and the winning flags of the other winning combinations are turned off.

Further, as described above, since winnings of small wins and replays other than 1BB are not carried over, even if small wins or replays are won in this game and the winning flags of these roles are turned on, the end of this game Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the winning of 1BB is carried over, if the winning flag related to the winning 1BB is once turned on in the game this time, the on state is maintained until the winning of that 1BB, It will be turned off when 1BB wins.

Further, for example, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the winning combination of 1BBA and the small winning combination D, the winning flag of the small winning combination 35 corresponding to the 1BBA and the small winning combination D is turned on, and there is no case where both the winning combinations are won in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA is not won, the winning flag of 1BBA is kept on and the winning flag of the small win 35 is turned off regardless of whether or not the small win 35 has won.

Furthermore, for example, when the individual lottery means 61 wins 1BBA alone, the winning flag of 1BBA is turned on in the current game, and when 1BBA is not won in the current game, the winning flag of 1BBA is kept on. ..
Furthermore, in the next game, when you win the small role A1, in addition to the 1BBA that has carried over the winning, the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned on, and when 1BBA does not win at the end of the current game, 1BBA The winning flag of No. 1 is maintained, and the winning flag of the small win 01 is turned off.

The pushing order instruction number selecting means 63 selects a pushing order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the winning lottery means 61. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a push order instruction number table.
Note that the push-order instruction number selecting unit 63 may select the push-order instruction number in any of the advantageous section and the normal section, but the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, only in the advantageous section. The pressing order instruction number may be selected. In such a case, the pressing order instruction number is always "A0" during the normal section.
Further, the selected pushing order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only during the advantageous section (except for transmitting the pushing order instruction number "A0" during the normal section). Therefore, even if the pushing order instruction number is selected by the pushing order instruction number selecting unit 63 in the normal section, the pushing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device is provided with a unique push order instruction number. For example, the push order instruction number corresponding to replay A is “A0”, and the push order instruction number corresponding to replay C3 is “A3”. The push order instruction numbers include “A0” to “A3”.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a relationship between a push order instruction number, a push order corresponding to the push order instruction number, and display contents 1 and 2. The push order instruction number “A0” does not have a push order advantageous to the player (advantage/disadvantage does not occur depending on the push order, that is, the push order does not matter).
In addition, each of the push order instruction numbers "A1" to "A3" has a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, the advantageous pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "A2" is the first stop in the middle.

The push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the replay B group is set to the push order for winning the replay 02 (the push order for promoting RT).
Further, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the replay C group is set to the push order for winning the replay 01 (maintaining RT).
Similarly, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small winning combination B group is set to the pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 (9 pieces).
The pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small winning combination C group is set to the pressing order for winning the small winning combination 02 (3 pieces).

Further, in FIG. 20, “display content 1” indicates the content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50), and in the present embodiment, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is displayed. Showing. In the present embodiment, the pushing order instruction numbers “A” and “0” to “3” correspond to the indications of “=” and “0” to “3” of the LED (7 segment), respectively. When “=” is displayed, the segments D and G in FIG. 4 among the 7 segments are turned on (see FIG. 26 described later). Further, in the case of the push order instruction number "A0", no display may be made (no segment is lit).

Furthermore, “display content 2” indicates the content displayed by the control of the sub control board 80, and in the present embodiment, the correct answer pressing order displayed on the image display device 23.
The “operation of the instruction function” means a display using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50, and the display by the control of the sub-control board 80 is the “operation of the instruction function” of the present invention. Is not included.
For example, when the winning and replay condition device "11" is won in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected, and the operation of the instruction function causes the acquisition number display LED 78 to display "=1". It Further, on the image display device 23, for example, "1○○" or the like is displayed as an image of a content that allows the player to understand that it is the left first stop.

In FIG. 19, the push order instruction number (*1) at the time of winning the small winning combination A is as follows.
When winning the small role A, the small role 01 wins regardless of the pressing order, so there is no advantageous pressing order. However, during the advantageous period, any one of “A1” to “A3” is selected as the dummy pressing order instruction number. The selectivities are "1/3", respectively. By setting in this way, when the small winning combination A is won in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated and the push order instruction information is displayed. As a result, the player cannot determine whether the small winning combination A is won or the small winning combination B group is won in the game. The reason for setting in this way is as follows.

As shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability (register) of the small winning combination A is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. Therefore, it is possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of times the small winning combination 01 is won in the game in which the instruction function does not operate during the advantageous section. In order to avoid such a strategy, when the small winning combination A is won in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated to display the dummy pushing order instruction information. Of course, it is not impossible to guess the set value by counting the number of times that the small role 01 won in the game that activated the instruction function, but the number of times that the small role 01 won in the game that did not activate the instruction function A larger number of trials are required than when counting and estimating the set value.

Furthermore, the pushing order instruction information (*2) at the time of winning the small winning combinations E1 and E2 in FIG. 19 is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 17, when the winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. However, as described above, when 1BB is won during the advantageous section and the inside is reached, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, in the advantageous section and inside (during the game section in which the advantageous section is not added), the small winning combination E1 is won, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination E1 (the combination of the symbols expected to be added to the advantageous section When a certain middle-tier cherry) stops, there is a risk of giving the player the impression that he is wasted. Therefore, when the small winning combination E1 is won in the advantageous zone and inside, the pushing order instruction number "A3" is selected, the instruction function is activated, and "right first stop" is displayed.

When the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop on the right when the small role E1 is won, the so-called middle-tier cherry does not stop, as shown in FIG. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small role E1. It should be noted that since the small payouts 36 and 38 that can be won when the small win E1 is won have two payout numbers, there is no disadvantage to the player even if the right first stop is instructed.

Further, as described above, the upper limit number of games is set for the advantageous section, and in the present embodiment, it is set within 1500 games. Therefore, even when the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is reached, when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section is unconditionally terminated.
In the case of having such playability, for example, when the small role E1 is won and the middle row cherry is displayed when the game is close to 1500 games in the advantageous section, the player expects to add to the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after 1400 games or more have started from the start of the advantageous section, even if the small winning combination E1 is won, the middle tier cherry is not displayed as in the internal winning. , Activate the indicating function and display the first stop on the right.

In addition, when the small winning combination E2 is won, as shown in FIG. 18, the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed. However, when the small win E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the left or middle first stop, the middle cherry may be displayed. Therefore, when the middle tier cherry is displayed when the number of games is 1,400 or more since the start of the inside or the advantageous section, there is a possibility that the player may be misunderstood. , Display the first stop on the right.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the small winning combination E2 is won, since the determination regarding the advantageous section is not made in the first place, the operation of the instruction function as described above may not be performed and the middle row cherry may be displayed.

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device and is a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As a result of performing the condition device lottery, it is conceivable that the winning and replay condition device numbers themselves that have been won are transmitted to the sub-control board 80. However, in the present embodiment, the winning and winning and replay condition device numbers themselves are not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 side cannot know the winning and replay condition device numbers won in the game this time.

On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, an effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is set in advance. Then, after the condition device is selected by lottery, the effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number selected in the game this time, it becomes possible to select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect group number table.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each condition device is provided with a unique effect group number. For example, the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group is defined as "5". The effect group numbers corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group may be different, such as "5", "6", and "7", respectively.

Therefore, when the main control board 50 wins the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group as a result of the lottery of the condition device, it selects "5" as the effect group number. Then, the information of the selected effect group number “5” is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the information that the effect group number is "5", it can know that in this game, one of the small combination A, the small combination B group, or the small combination C group has been won. it can. As a result, the winning effect of the bell can be output.

However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating that the effect group number “5” has been won, even if the player wins one of the small win group B in the game, the correct answer is pressed. I can't know the order. Then, in the present embodiment, the pressing order instruction numbers corresponding to the correct pressing order are transmitted to the sub control board 80 during the advantageous section, but are not transmitted during the normal section or the standby section. Therefore, during the advantageous period, the sub-control board 80 can output the fact that the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group has been won and the correct pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number. it can. On the other hand, in the normal section or the standby section, the sub-control board 80 stays in the effect of winning one of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group (bell), and presses the correct answer order. Cannot be output as an effect.

Even if the same pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, different effect groups can output different effects because of different effect group numbers. For example, the winning order instruction number when winning the replay B1 is "A1" (first left), and the winning order instruction number when winning the small win C1 is "A1" (first left). In both cases, the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

However, when the replay B1 is won, the production group number "2" is transmitted, and when the small combination C1 is won, the production group number "5" is transmitted. Therefore, when the effect group number “2” is transmitted, for example, it is possible to notify the correct pressing order by using blue indicating replay, and when the effect group number “5” is transmitted, for example, the bell It is possible to notify the correct pressing order by using yellow indicating.

In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 starts rotation of all (three) reels 31 when a rotation start command for the reels 31 is received, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in this embodiment. To control. Further, the reel control means 65 refers to ON/OFF of the winning flag in the current game after the role lottery means 61 has performed the condition device lottery, and refers to the stop position determination table corresponding to ON/OFF of the winning flag. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is driven. The reel 31 is controlled to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, the reel control means 65, in the game in which at least one winning flag is on, within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination (winning flag is on) The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that it can be stopped on the activated line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (a winning combination whose winning flag is off) is not stopped on the activated line. ..

Here, "within the stop control range of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). Means within the range.
In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. As a result, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to four frames.

For example, in FIG. 5, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "replay" of the left reel 31 is located in the lower left stage (on the effective line), four frames ahead, that is, the fifth "bell" "B" is a pattern that can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols No. 1 (bitter stop) to No. 5 (4 comers) can be stopped in the lower left stage.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and it is possible to set the maximum number of moving frames to 4 from the next symbol to the symbol located on the activated line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "replay" of the left reel 31 is located in the lower left stage, from the next symbol, that is, the second "blank", The symbols up to No. 6 "Replay", which is the symbol four frames ahead, are the symbols that can be stopped in the lower left stage. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols Nos. 2 to 6 can be stopped at the lower left stage.
In the following description, it is assumed that the maximum number of moving frames is four from the symbols located on the activated line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.

First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the stop control range of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated In addition, the design is controlled so as to stop at a predetermined effective line.

That is, when the reel 31 is immediately stopped at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop on a predetermined effective line, the stop control of the reel 31 is stopped before the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range, the symbols related to the winning combination are controlled to be stopped on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

On the contrary, when the reel 31 is immediately stopped at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control of 31, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled so as not to stop on the activated line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority order of the winning combination is predetermined according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. Perform pull-in stop control for the symbol that has the highest priority.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 65 detects which of the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 is operated when the player operates the stop switch 42.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 65. By discriminating this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

Further, the reel control means 65 includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, in each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol (“replay” for the left reel 31) passes through the lower left stage (on the effective line), The stop position is set in advance such that the number of symbols is stopped in the lower left stage by controlling the movement of only the symbols (how many frames).

Here, the symbol array in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 5, in all reels 31, four "replays" are arranged at intervals of five symbols. As a result, the “replay” of all reels 31 is “PB=1” arrangement.
Similarly, in the left reel 31, four "Bell A" or "Bell B" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the total of these two symbols is “PB=1” arrangement.
Further, in the middle reel 31, four "bells C" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the "bell C" of the middle reel 31 is in the "PB=1" arrangement.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, four "Bell A" or "Bell B" are arranged at five symbol intervals. As a result, the total of these two symbols is “PB=1” arrangement.

Further, on the right reel 31, four "cherries" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. As a result, the “cherry” on the right reel 31 is in the “PB=1” arrangement.
Further, on the left reel 31, four of either "black 7" or "watermelon" are arranged at 5 symbol intervals. As a result, the total of these two symbols is “PB=1” arrangement.
Similarly, on the middle reel 31, four "blue 7" or "cherry" are arranged at 5 symbol intervals. As a result, the total of these two symbols is “PB=1” arrangement.
Further, similarly, on the right reel 31, four "black 7", "blue 7", "blank", or "red 7" are arranged at five symbol intervals. As a result, the total of these four symbols is “PB=1” arrangement.

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, the "cherries" are arranged at the numbers 3, 8, and 13, so the arrangement is not "PB=1".
Similarly, for the “watermelon”, the left and middle reels 31 have the “PB≠1” arrangement, and the right reel 31 has the “PB=1” arrangement.

The stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described below with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16 described above.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning the prize and replay condition device will be described.
The non-winning table is used in the game when a winning combination is not won, and defines the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that the combination of symbols corresponding to any winning combination does not stop on the activated line.

The Replay A table is used at the time of Replay A winning (single winning of Replay 01), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the Replay 01 is stopped on the effective line. The stop position of 31 is defined. The symbols of the reels 31 relating to the replay 01 and the replays 02 to 06 to be described later are “PB=1” arrangement in all the reels 31. Therefore, when the replay is won, the replay that has been won at all times (when a plurality of replays have been won multiple times, one of the replays that has been won multiple times) always wins.

The replay B1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay B1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, when the left first stop (at the time of pressing order correct answer), the replay 02 is stopped at the effective line and the left first stop is performed. The stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop the replay 01 on the effective line except when the time is wrong (when the pushing order is incorrect) (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game in which the Replay B1 table is used, "Black 7" or "Watermelon" is stopped at the lower left stage at the first left stop ("PB=1" as described above). In this case, the "replay" is stopped at the upper left.
Next, at the second middle stop, the "replay" is stopped in the middle middle stage. Then, at the time of the third stop on the right, "Cherry" is stopped on the upper right. In this case, "replay" is stopped at the lower right. As a result, "black 7/watermelon"-"replay"-"cherry" are stopped on the activated line, and the replay 02 wins. Furthermore, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped at "upper left"-"middle middle"-"lower right".

On the other hand, in the game in which the Replay B1 table is used, "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is stopped in the middle and middle stages ("PB=1") at the middle first stop. In this case, the "replay" is stopped in the middle and upper stages. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped in the lower left stage ("PB=1"). At this time, as described above, the "replay" is stopped in the upper left stage.
When the right reel 31 is stopped, "replay" is stopped in the upper right stage ("PB=1"). As a result, "black 7/watermelon"-"blue 7/cherry"-"replay" are stopped on the activated line, and the replay 01 is won. Furthermore, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped at "upper left"-"middle upper"-"upper right".

In the game in which the Replay B1 table is used, the same control is performed when the right first stop is made as in the middle first stop.
Further, with respect to the Replay B2 table at the time of winning the Replay B2 and the Replay B3 table at the time of winning the Replay B3, Replay 02 is awarded when the correct answer is in the pushing order and Replay 01 is awarded when the incorrect answer is in the pushing order by the same control as above.

The replay C1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay C1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the first stop at the left (when the correct answer is in the pushing order) stops the replay 01 at the effective line and the first stop at the left. The stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop the replay 03 on the activated line except when the time is wrong (when the pushing order is incorrect) (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control for stopping the replay 01 at the effective line at the first left stop is the same as that of the replay B1 table, and the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the "replay" is stopped in the middle and middle stages ("PB=1") at the middle first stop. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the lower left stage ("PB=1"). In this case, the "replay" is stopped at the left middle stage. When the right reel 31 is stopped, the “watermelon” is stopped at the upper right (“PB=1”). In this case, the "replay" is stopped at the right middle stage. As a result, "Bell A/Bell B"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" is stopped on the activated line, and Replay 03 wins. Furthermore, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" is stopped at "left middle"-"middle middle"-"right middle".

In the game in which the Replay C1 table is used, the same control is performed when the right first stop is made as in the middle first stop.
Furthermore, with respect to the Replay C2 table when Replay C2 is won and the Replay C3 table when Replay C3 is won, by the same control as above, Replay 01 is awarded when the correct push order is answered, and Replay 03 is awarded when the wrong push order is answered. ..

The replay D table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay D, and within the stop control range of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop the replay 06 on the effective line. It has been set. Replay 06 has “PB=1”.
Further, the replay E table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay E, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the replay 04 or 05 is stopped on the effective line. The stop position of 31 is defined. In this case, either "Replay 04" or "05" can be stopped by "PB=1".

The small win A table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win A, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small win 01 is stopped on the effective line. It defines the stop position. The combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 01 is "black 7/watermelon"-"bell C"-"replay", and "PB=1" on all reels 31. Further, when "black 7/watermelon" is stopped at the lower left stage, "bell A/bell B" is stopped at the left middle stage. Furthermore, when "Replay" is stopped in the upper right, "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped in the right middle. Therefore, when the small winning combination 01 is won, "Bell A/Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A/Bell B" is stopped in "Left Middle Stage"-"Middle Middle Stage"-"Right Middle Stage".

The small winning combination B1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small winning combination B1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small winning combination 01 is stopped on the effective line at the first stop on the left (when the pushing order is correct), and left. Except during the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), a single winning role included in the winning combination (small winning role 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26 when winning the small winning role B1) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop on the effective line or to stop any of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

Since the left first stop (at the time of pushing order correct answer) in the game in which the small winning combination B1 table is used is the same as the small winning combination A table, the description thereof will be omitted.
Even when the following small winning combination B2 table to small winning combination B12 table are used, the same stop control as that of the small winning combination A table is performed when the pushing order is correct.
As a result, at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order when the small winning combination A is won and when the small winning group B is won, the small winning combination 01 is always won, and the "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row", "Bell A/Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A/Bell B" stops. Therefore, even if the small prize 01 is won in the game in which the instruction function is not activated, it is not known to the player whether the small prize A is won or the small order B group is pushed and the push order is correct.

Further, even during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination A is won, it is determined whether the small winning combination A is won or the small winning group B is won by activating the instruction function with the dummy as described above. I don't know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, since the winning number of the small winning combination A has a setting difference, it is possible to estimate the setting value by counting the number of winnings of the small winning combination A. However, if the stop result is the same when the small win A wins and the push order correct answer when the small win B group wins, it is not possible to count only the number of winnings of the small win A. Can't guess.

In the game in which the small winning combination B1 table is used, more specifically, the following stop control is executed.
First, when the small win B1 is won, as shown in FIG. 14, seven small wins 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26 are won, and the combinations of the symbols are as follows.
Small Role 01: "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small role 03: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

Then, the following method can be used as the stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small winning combinations having different payout numbers are repeatedly won.
As a first priority, when it is possible to stop all of the symbols (of the reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to "stop all of the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination on the activated line" (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is "number of sheets priority". The reel 31 is stopped and controlled by either "" or "number priority".
Here, the "number priority" means that among the combinations of the symbols that are won in duplicate, the symbols of the reel 31 that constitute the combination of the symbols with the largest payout number are given priority to be stopped (pulled in) to the effective line. Say. Therefore, at the time of winning the small winning combination B group, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts (nine).
On the other hand, “number priority” means stopping the symbols on the reel 31 on the active line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the active line is the largest.

For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is performed, it is not possible to stop all the middle reels 31 related to the winning combination on the activated line at the same time. This is because, while there are a plurality of types of symbols on the medium reel 31 of the winning small winning combination, only one type of symbol can be stopped on the activated line since there is only one activated line.

Therefore, when the small winning combination B group is won, the reels 31 are stop-controlled by either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number when the answer is correct in the pressing order, and the reels 31 are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number when the answer is incorrect in the pressing order. When the reels are stopped and controlled by the priority of the number of pieces, the small winning combination 01 (9 winning combinations) is configured so that one winning combination can be won (without losing).
As described above, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is such that the number of sheets is prioritized in a specific pressing order (correct answer pressing order in this embodiment), and the number of pieces is prioritized in another pressing order (wrong answer pressing order in this embodiment). Depending on the number of sheets, priority is given to the number of sheets or the number of sheets.

In the above example, when priority is given to the number at the time of the medium first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), if either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the effective line, it is stopped on the effective line. The maximum number of possible symbol combinations is two. For example, if the "bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small win 03 or 11 can be won. "Bell A" or "Bell B" of the middle reel 31 is "PB=1" in total of the two symbols, so when the middle reel 31 is stopped, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is always stopped. Can be made.
Here, it is assumed that the "bell A" is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won at this point.

Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping “bell A” or “bell C” on the activated line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, the "bell A" is arranged at the 15th and 0th, and the "bell C" is arranged at the 18th. Therefore, when the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are 11th to 19th and 0th, the "bell A" or "bell C" can be stopped on the activated line. When the number is 1 to 10, "Bell A" or "Bell C" cannot be stopped on the activated line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming for a specific symbol), “Bell A” or “Bell C” stops on the activated line with a probability of “1/2”. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the "bell A" can be stopped without stopping the "bell C", the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are 11th to 19th and 0th. If so, "Bell A" is always stopped on the activated line.
In addition, stopping the "bell A" without stopping the "bell C" in this way makes it possible to display a pattern pattern described later when the winning combination is missed during the third stop. This is because (when the "bell C" is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped, the pattern design cannot be displayed).

On the other hand, when the "bell A" cannot be stopped on the activated line when the left reel 31 is stopped, one of the pattern symbols is controlled to be stopped on the activated line. As shown in FIG. 12, among the pattern symbols in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “bell A”, the symbol of the left reel 31 is “black 7” or “watermelon”. Since "Black 7" or "Watermelon" of the left reel 31 is "PB=1" in the total of the two symbols, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols.

Therefore, at the middle first stop and the second left stop, "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7/watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating". ..
Further, before the third stop on the right side, when “Bell A”-“Bell A”-“Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, when “Bell A” can be stopped on the effective line, “Bell A” is displayed. Stop Bell A". As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop the "bell A" on the activated line, if the symbol of the activated line at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of 4 to 13, stop the "bell A". "Bell A" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell A" stops on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" is obtained, and the small prize 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell A"-"bell A"-"in rotation", when "bell A" cannot be stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is activated on the activated line. It is stopped (“PB=1”). As a result, the combination of symbols on the activated line becomes “bell A”-“bell A”-“cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
In the case of "black 7/watermelon"-"bell A"-"in rotation", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line ("PB=1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the activated line becomes “black 7/watermelon”-“bell A”-“bell A/bell B”, and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped on the activated line at the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) during the winning of the small role B1. In this case, at this point, the small winning combination 10 or 18 can be won.
Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping the "bell B" or "red 7" which is the symbol relating to the small winning combination 10 or 18 on the activated line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, "bell B" is arranged at the 5th and 10th, and "red 7" is arranged at the 7th. Therefore, when the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are Nos. 1 to 10, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can be stopped on the effective line, and otherwise. At times, "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped on the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming for a specific symbol), "bell B" or "red 7" is stopped on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". In particular, in the present embodiment, since the "bell B" can be stopped without stopping the "red 7", when the symbols of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are the numbers 1 to 10. Always stops "bell B" on the active line.

On the other hand, when the "bell B" cannot be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, one of the pattern symbols is controlled to be stopped on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern design in which the design of the middle reel 31 is “bell B” is “black 7” or “watermelon”. Since "Black 7" or "Watermelon" of the left reel 31 is "PB=1" in the total of the two symbols, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols.

Therefore, at the middle first stop and the second left stop, "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7/watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating". ..
Further, before the third stop on the right side, when “Bell B”-“Bell B”-“Rotating”, when the right reel 31 is stopped, when “Bell B” can be stopped on the activated line, “Bell B” is displayed. Stop Bell B". As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop the "bell B" on the activated line, the symbol of the activated line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated must be in the range of 14 to 18 or 19 to 3. "Bell B" can be stopped, and "Bell B" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell B" stops on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" is obtained, and the small prize 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell B"-"bell B"-"in rotation", if "bell B" cannot be stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is activated on the activated line. It is stopped (“PB=1”). As a result, the combination of symbols on the activated line becomes “bell B”-“bell B”-“cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
Further, in the case of "black 7/watermelon"-"bell B"-"in rotation", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line ("PB=1"). ). As a result, the combination of symbols on the activated line becomes "black 7/watermelon"-"bell B"-"bell A/bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, at the time of the first stop in the small winning combination B1 winning, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol related to the one winning combination with "PB=1", and the left and right reels 31 both have "1". It is possible to stop the symbol related to one winning combination with a probability of "/2". Furthermore, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to the one-card combination, the pattern symbol can always be stopped. Therefore, at the time of the first stop in the middle when winning the small role B1 (when the pushing order is incorrect),
1-card combination: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning one role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
Will be either.

Next, the case of the first right stop when the small win B1 is won will be described. When priority is given to the number when the right reel 31 is stopped, if either "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line, the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the activated line is 2 each. Becomes the maximum. For example, if "bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small win 03 or 19 can be won. "Bell A" or "Bell B" of the right reel 31 is "PB=1" in total of the two symbols, so when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell B" can always be stopped. it can.
First, it is assumed that the "bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, the small prize 03 or 19 can be won at this point.

Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping the "bell A" or "bell C" that is the symbol relating to the small win 03 or 19 on the activated line. Here, similarly to the above, the stop of "bell A" is prioritized. "Bell A" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". Moreover, when "bell A" cannot be stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped ("PB=1" in the total of the two symbols).

Therefore, at the first stop on the right side and the second stop on the left side, "bell A"-"in rotation"-"bell A" or "black 7/watermelon"-"in rotation"-"bell A". ..
Furthermore, before the middle third stop, when "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" can be stopped on the activated line, " Stop Bell A". As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop the "bell A" on the activated line, if the symbol of the activated line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of 5 to 14, stop the "bell A". "Bell A" cannot be stopped in other ranges. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell A" stops on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the result is "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A", and the small win 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", if "bell A" cannot be stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "blue 7" or "cherry 7" Is stopped on the activated line ("PB=1" in the total of the two symbols). As a result, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped on the activated line.
Further, in the case of "black 7/watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line ("PB=1"). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped on the activated line.

Further, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time. In this case, the small winning combination 10 or 26 can be won at this point.
Next, when the left reel 31 is stopped, priority is given to stopping the "bell B" or "red 7" which is the symbol relating to the small winning combination 10 or 26 on the activated line. Here, the stop of "bell B" is prioritized. "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". Moreover, when "bell B" cannot be stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped ("PB=1" in the total of the two symbols).

Therefore, at the first stop on the right side and the second stop on the left side, "bell B"-"in rotation"-"bell B" or "black 7/watermelon"-"in rotation"-"bell B". ..
Furthermore, before the third stop in the middle, in the case of "bell B"-"in rotation"-"bell B", when "bell B" can be stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, " Stop Bell B". Here, when the middle reel 31 is randomly stopped, the "bell B" is stopped on the activated line with a probability of "1/2". When "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" is obtained, and the small prize 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell B"-"in rotation"-"bell B", if "bell B" cannot be stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "blue 7" or "cherry""Is stopped on the activated line ("PB=1" in the total of the two symbols). As a result, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped on the activated line.
Further, in the case of "black 7/watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line ("PB=1"). ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped on the activated line.

As described above, at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination B1 is won, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to the one winning combination with "PB=1", and the left and right reels 31 both have "1". It is possible to stop the symbol related to one winning combination with a probability of "/2". Furthermore, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to the one-card combination, the pattern symbol can always be stopped. Therefore, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B1 (when the pushing order is incorrect),
1-card combination: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning one role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
Will be either.
The winning rate and the stop rate of the pattern design are the same as those in the first stop.
Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins with "PB=1" when the first stop on the left side (when the correct answer is in the pushing order). On the other hand, at the time of the first stop in the middle or the right (at the time of incorrect answer in the pushing order), in both cases, one winning combination is won with a probability of "1/4", and the pattern pattern is stopped with a probability of "3/4". ..

Even when the small winning combination B2 is won, the small winning combination B2 table is provided as in the small winning combination B1 winning. The winning roles included when winning the small role B2 are:
Small Role 01: "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small role 04: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first stop on the left (at the time of correct answer in the pushing order), the small winning combination 01 is won.
Next, at the time of the first stop in the middle (when the pushing order is incorrect), the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line by prioritizing the number of pieces.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first stop in the middle, and when "Bell A" or "Bell C" is stopped at the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell A" or "Bell C". Here, since "bell A" can be stopped when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". When "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell A"-"bell A"-"in rotation" or "black 7/watermelon"-"bell A"-"in rotation".

When "bell A"-"bell A"-"in rotation", "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop, and "bell B" is stopped. As a result, the small role 04 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped at the right stop, "cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the first stop in the middle. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, since "bell B" can be stopped when "red 7" can be stopped, "bell B" is stopped without stopping "red 7". When "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell B"-"bell B"-"in rotation" or "black 7/watermelon"-"bell B"-"in rotation".

When "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it can be stopped at the right stop. As a result, the small winning combination 09 is won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped at the right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small win B2 (when the pushing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the activated line according to the number priority.
First, when the "bell A" is stopped at the first stop on the right side, the priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7" at the left stop. Here, since "bell B" can be stopped when "red 7" can be stopped, "bell B" is stopped without stopping "red 7". When "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell B"-"in rotation"-"bell A" or "black 7/watermelon"-"in rotation"-"bell A".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop at "middle stop". As a result, the small winning combination 09 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"in rotation"-"bell A" is reached, the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the first stop on the right side. In this case, when the vehicle is stopped to the left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, since "bell A" can be stopped when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell A"-"in rotation"-"bell B" or "black 7/watermelon"-"in rotation"-"bell B".

When "bell A"-"in rotation"-"bell B", "bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "bell A" during middle stop. As a result, the small role 04 is won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"during rotation"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B2 is elected and the pushing order is incorrect,
1-card combination: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning one role,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small role 09)
Will be either.

Even when the small winning combination B3 is won, the small winning combination B3 table is provided as in the small winning combination B1 winning. The winning roles included when winning the small role B3 are:
Small Role 01: "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small Role 05: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first stop on the left (at the time of correct answer in the pushing order), the small winning combination 01 is won.
Next, at the time of the first stop in the middle (when the pushing order is incorrect), the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line by prioritizing the number of pieces.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first stop in the middle, and when "Bell A" is stopped at the left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Here, similarly to the above, “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7”. When "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell B"-"bell A"-"in rotation" or "black 7/watermelon"-"bell A"-"in rotation".

When "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating", "bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "bell B" at the right stop. As a result, the small role 08 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped at the right stop, "cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the first stop in the middle. In this case, when the vehicle is stopped to the left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, similarly to the above, the "bell A" is stopped without stopping the "bell C". If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell A"-"bell B"-"in rotation" or "black 7/watermelon"-"bell B"-"in rotation".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"in rotation", "bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "bell A" at the right stop. As a result, the small prize 05 is won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped at the right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small win B2 (when the pushing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the activated line according to the number priority.
First, when the "bell A" is stopped at the first stop on the right, the priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C" at the left stop. Here, "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as above. When "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7/watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop at "middle stop". As a result, the small prize 05 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"in rotation"-"bell A" is reached, the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the first stop on the right side. In this case, when stopping to the left, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, "bell B" is stopped in the same manner as above. When "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell B"-"in rotation"-"bell B", or "black 7/watermelon"-"in rotation"-"bell B".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "bell A" during middle stop. As a result, the small role 08 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"during rotation"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B3 is elected and the pushing order is incorrect,
1-card combination: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning one role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small role 05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 08)
Will be either.

Even when the small winning combination B4 is won, the small winning combination B4 table is provided as in the case of winning the small winning combination B1. The winning roles included in the winning role B4 are:
Small Role 01: "Black 7/Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small Role 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small Role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Is.

Then, at the time of the first stop on the left (at the time of correct answer in the pushing order), the small winning combination 01 is won.
Next, at the time of the first stop in the middle (when the pushing order is incorrect), the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line by prioritizing the number of pieces.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the first middle stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the time of left stop, but here, the same as above. Stop "Bell B". When "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell B"-"bell A"-"in rotation" or "black 7/watermelon"-"bell A"-"in rotation".

When "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped when it can be stopped at the right stop. As a result, the small prize 07 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped at the right stop, "cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the first stop in the middle. In this case, when the vehicle is stopped to the left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell A"-"bell B"-"in rotation" or "black 7/watermelon"-"bell B"-"in rotation".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"in rotation", "bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop "bell B" at the right stop. As a result, the small prize 06 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped at the right stop, "cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B4 (when the pushing order is incorrect), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the activated line according to the number priority.
First, when the "bell A" is stopped at the first stop on the right side, the priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7" at the left stop. Here, "bell B" is stopped in the same manner as above. When "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell B"-"in rotation"-"bell A" or "black 7/watermelon"-"in rotation"-"bell A".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" is stopped when it is possible to stop "bell A" during middle stop. As a result, the small prize 07 is won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"in rotation"-"bell A" is reached, the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the first stop on the right side. In this case, when the vehicle is stopped to the left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as above. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped, "Black 7/Watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, either "bell A"-"in rotation"-"bell B" or "black 7/watermelon"-"in rotation"-"bell B".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell B" is stopped when it is possible to stop at "middle stop". As a result, the small prize 06 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7/cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7/watermelon"-"during rotation"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, when the small role B4 is elected and the pushing order is incorrect,
1-card combination: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning one role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small role 07)
Will be either.

Hereinafter, detailed description of each of the small role B5 table to the small role B12 table at the time of winning the small role B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
Small role B5 In the small role B5 table used at the time of winning, the small role 01 wins at the first stop when the correct answer is in the pushing order, and the small role 03 or small with a probability of "1/4" when the wrong answer in the pushing order. The winning combination 10 wins, and the pattern pattern stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
In addition, in the small role B6 table used when the small role B6 is won, the small role 01 is won at the first stop during the correct pressing order, and the small role 04 with a probability of "1/4" at the incorrect pressing order. Or, the small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern pattern stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B2.

Furthermore, in the small role B7 table used when the small role B7 is won, the small role 01 is won at the first stop during the correct pressing order, and the small role with a probability of "1/4" at the incorrect pressing order. 05 or small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern pattern stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3.
Further, in the small role B8 table used when the small role B8 is won, the small role 01 is won at the first stop of the pressing order correct answer, and the small role 06 at a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins, and the pattern pattern stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

Small role B9 In the small role B9 table used at the time of winning, small role 01 wins at the right first stop when the pressing order is correct, and there is a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect and small role 03 or small. The winning combination 10 wins, and the pattern pattern stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
Further, in the small role B10 table used when the small role B10 is won, the small role 01 is won at the right first stop which is the correct pressing order, and the small role 04 with a probability of "1/4" when the wrong pressing order is answered. Or, the small winning combination 09 wins, and the pattern pattern stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B2.

Furthermore, in the small win B11 table used when the small win B11 is won, the small win 01 is won at the right first stop, which is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small win with a probability of "1/4" when the incorrect answer is in the pushing order. 05 or small winning combination 08 wins, and the pattern pattern stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3.
Further, in the small role B12 table used when the small role B12 is won, the small role 01 is won at the first right stop when the pressing order is correct, and the small role 06 at a probability of "1/4" when the pressing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins, and the pattern pattern stops with a probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

As is clear from the above, the small winning combinations 03 to 10 are the single winning combinations that can be won at the time of incorrect answer in the pushing order at the time of winning the small winning combination B group. Therefore, small wins other than the above included in each condition device will not win. The setting in this way is related to the one-piece winning combination that can be won when the small winning combination C group is won, which will be described later.

The small win C1 table is used in the game when the small win C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small win 02 is stopped on the activated line at the first stop on the left (when the pushing order is correct), and left. At the time other than the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the one-card combination (one of the small combinations 03 to 10 when the small combination C1 is selected) included in the winning combination is stopped on the activated line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

When the small winning combination C1 (similarly to small winning combinations C2 and C3 to be described later) is elected, when the correct answer is in the pushing order, the small winning combination 02 (three winning roles) is won by the priority of the number, as in the small winning group B winning. Control. As shown in FIG. 7, the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 02 is "bell A/bell B"-"blue 7/cherry"-"watermelon", and "PB=1" for all reels 31. .. Therefore, when the answer is correct in the pushing order, the small winning combination 02 can be always won.

Further, when the small winning combination C1 is elected, when the pressing order is incorrect (middle or right first stop), the winning combination is controlled so that the one winning combination (small winning combinations 03 to 10) is given priority. Here, the symbol combination of the small wins 03 to 10 is a combination of the symbols of "bell A" or "bell B" for each reel 31, as shown in FIG. Further, among the combinations of the symbols of the small roles 03 to 10, on any reel 31, there are four "bell A" and four "bell B", and either "bell A" or "bell B" is selected. Even if it is stopped, the number priority condition is satisfied. In particular, at the time of winning the small winning combination C2 and the small winning combination C3, the small winning combination 21 and the small winning combination 22 are included, respectively. Even if these small winning combinations are included in the winning combination, there is no change in the type of the symbols having the number priority. Further, in all reels 31, "bell A" or "bell B" is "PB=1" in the total of the two symbols. Therefore, it is possible to always win one of the small wins 03 to 10.

From the above, when the small winning combination C1 is won, the small winning combination 02 (three winning combinations) is awarded when the correct answer is in the pushing order (“PB=1”), and when the incorrect pressing order is incorrect, one of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 (1 A winning combination is won (“PB=1”), and a dropout (stop of the pattern pattern) as in winning the small winning combination B group does not occur.

The small win C2 table and the small win C3 table used at the time of winning the small win C2 and the small win C3 are the same as the small win C1 table. As shown in FIG. 16, when the small win C2 is won, the middle first stop is the correct push order, and when the small win C3 is win, the right first stop is the correct push order. The stop control for winning the small win 02 or the small wins 03 to 10 is the same as that at the time of winning the small win C1, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, one winning combination (small winnings 03 to 10) that can be stopped when a small winning group B wins, and one winning winning that can stop when a small winning group C wins. The small roles 03 to 10) are the same. As a result, it is not possible to judge whether the small win B group or the small win C group has been won in the game just by seeing the winning of the small wins 03 to 10.

The small winning combination D table is used in the game at the time of winning the small winning combination D, and defines the stop position of the reel 31 so as to stop the small winning combination 35 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In the small win table D, the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed does not matter. As shown in FIG. 9, the combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 35 is a “watermelon” set. The “watermelon” has a “PB≠1” arrangement on the left and middle reels 31 and a “PB=1” arrangement on the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game in which the small win D table is used, in the left and middle reels 31, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" stops on the effective line, the "watermelon" stops on the effective line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line, the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line and the small win 35 is dropped.

The small win E1 table is used in the game when the small win E1 is won, and defines the stop position of the reel 31 so as to stop the small win 36 or 38 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. Is. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the left or middle first stop, a so-called middle cherry stop type is formed (so that the “cherry” stops in the middle left). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that the middle cherry does not stop when the stop switch 42 is operated in the first stop on the right side.

In addition, the winning of the small role E1 includes the small roles 36 and 38 (further, the small role 37 is included when the small role E2 is won, which will be described later). The prioritized number/number of sheets is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by any predetermined stop control. Therefore, during the first stop of the left or middle, the winning of the small winning combination 36 is controlled to be prioritized, and during the first stopping of the right, the winning of the small winning combination 38 is controlled to be prioritized.

In FIG. 5, "cherries" on the left reel 31 are numbers 3, 8, and 13 ("PB≠1"). Then, when "Cherry" is stopped in the middle left stage, "Blank" or "Red 7" is stopped in the activated line which is the lower left stage. Therefore, in this case, the symbols related to the small winning combination 36 for the left reel 31 are stopped.

For example, when No. 7 “Red 7” is stopped in the lower left tier during the first left stop (“Cherry” is stopped in the middle left tier), “Blue 7” or “Cherry” is valid when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop on the line ("PB=1"), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, either "black 7", "blue 7", "red 7", or "blank" (4 symbols total "PB=" 1”) is stopped on the active line. As a result, the small win 36 is won.
Further, when the "blank" of No. 2 or No. 12 is stopped at the lower left tier when the left reel 31 is stopped ("cherry" is stopped at the middle left tier), as in the above case, when the middle reel 31 is stopped ""Blue7" or "cherry" is stopped on the activated line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, either "black 7", "blue 7", "red 7", or "blank" is stopped on the activated line. .. As a result, the small win 36 is won.

Also during the first stop, the stop control is performed in the same manner as above. Therefore, in the middle and right reels 31, the symbol relating to the small winning combination 36 is stopped at "PB=1", and for the left reel 31, there are cases where "red 7" or "blank" is stopped and cases where it is not stopped ( "PB≠1").
However, when "Red 7" or "Blank" cannot be stopped at the lower left stage at the left or middle first stop, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped. “Bell A” or “Bell B” can be stopped at “PB=1”. The stop type in this case is "bell A/bell B"-"blue 7/cherry"-"black 7/blue 7/red 7/blank", and the small win 38 wins.

On the other hand, in a game in which the small win E1 table is used, the winning of the small win 38 is prioritized at the time of the first right stop. Therefore, in this case, "bell A/bell B"-"blue 7/cherry"-"black 7/blue 7/red 7/blank" is stopped, and the small role 38 wins with "PB=1". ..
Further, at the first stop on the right side, even if "Cherry" can be stopped on the left middle stage when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell" on the lower left stage is not stopped without stopping "Cherry" on the left middle stage. "B" (in this case, "Cherry" is not stopped in the middle left).

The small win E2 table is used in the game when the small win E1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small win 36 or 38 (or the small win 37) is stopped on the effective line. It defines the stop position of.
Therefore, since the small win E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small win E1 table, it is possible to use the same stop position determination table.

Alternatively, in the case of the first stop on the left side, only when the "red 7" or the "blank" can be stopped in the lower left stage (when the middle stage cherry is stopped), "replay" is set as the effective line for the middle reel 31. You may make it stop ("PB=1") and stop any of "black 7", "blue 7", "red 7", or "blank" about the right reel 31. As a result, the small role 37 wins. If the stop control is performed in this way, it is possible to determine whether the small win E1 is won or the small win E2 is won when the middle-tier cherry is stopped.

The small win F table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win F, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop any of the small wins 01 to 39 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It has been set.
In the present embodiment, the small winning combination F is drawn only during the operation of 1BB.
Further, the small winning combination F table performs stop control by giving priority to the number of sheets, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. Thereby, the small winning combination 39 is always won. In the left reel 31, since the two symbols “cherry” or “bell C” are arranged in “PB=1”, the small winning combination 39 wins in “PB=1”.

The small win G table is used in the game when the small win G is won, and defines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small win 40 is stopped on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. .. Since the small winning combination 40 is a combination of symbols arranged in "PB=1" for all reels 31, the small winning combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when the character condition device number "1" is won (1BBA alone is won), or when the player wins 1BBA before the previous game and is not won this time, and the reel 31 stop control is performed. Within the range, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is stopped on the activated line, and the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to combinations other than 1BBA on the activated line. It is a thing.
Since the symbol of 1BBA is "red 7" on all reels 31 (PB≠1), "red 7" cannot be stopped on the effective line without pressing.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used when the character condition device number "2" is won (1BBB alone), or when the player wins 1BBB before the previous game and is not won this time, and the reel 31 Within the range of the stop control, the combination of the symbols corresponding to 1BBB is stopped on the activated line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination other than 1BBB is not stopped on the activated line. The combination is defined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is “PB≠1” for all reels 31 as in 1BBA, “Red 7” and “Black 7” cannot be stopped on the effective line without pressing.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the game in which 1BB and the small role or replay are won, or in the game in which 1BB was won before the previous game and the small role or replay was won in this game, the following stop control is performed. Is mentioned.

For example, firstly, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small win or replay symbol on the activated line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the activated line, the elected small symbol There is a stop control that gives priority to stopping the symbol of the winning combination or the replay on the effective line. In addition, stop control to stop the symbols of both 1BB and small win or replay on the activated line is until the second stop, and at the third stop, it is controlled to win 1BB or small win or replay. There will be no double prize winning.
Secondly, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small win or replay symbol on the activated line, and when both symbols cannot be stopped on the activated line, the winning 1BB is elected. There is stop control (reverse to the above) that gives priority to stopping the symbol on the effective line.

Furthermore, thirdly, although priority is given to stopping the winning small win or replay symbol on the active line, when stopping the winning small win or replay symbol on the active line, When it is possible to stop the winning 1BB symbol on the activated line at the same time, stop control for stopping at that position can be mentioned.

In addition, when 1BB (“PB≠1”) and a small win or replay of “PB=1” are won at the same time (when they are simultaneously won), the winning 1BB symbol and the small win or replay It is not necessary to perform control to stop both the symbol and the effective line, and it is also possible to perform control so that only the small winning combination or replay symbol of "PB=1" is stopped on the effective line. Therefore, since the small winning combinations E1 and E2 are “PB=1”, only the small winning combinations E1 and E2 are selected when the 1BBA and the small winning combination E1 are repeatedly won and when the 1BBB and the small winning combination E2 are won, respectively. It is also possible to execute a stop control for winning.

The description returns to FIG.
The winning determination unit 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 stopped on the activated line matches the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination when the reels 31 are stopped (whether any winning combination has won). Or not). The winning determination means 66 determines the symbol on the activated line, for example, by detecting the angle when the motor 32 is stopped and the number of steps.

The payout means 67 determines, by the winning determination means 66, that the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations, and when the winning of the winning combination is achieved. Depending on the winning combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player, or processing such as credit addition is performed. In addition, at the time of winning the replay, the number of medals inserted in the game this time is automatically inserted without paying out the medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied at the time of stopping all the games and all reels 31 and, when it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, controls to perform the RT transition. It is a thing.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in this embodiment. As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), 1BBB operation (1BBB game). Then, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the type (number) of condition devices to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are different for each RT.

In the present embodiment, the transition timing of RT is set at the time of stop display of the combination of symbols or at the time of winning the RT transition combination, that is, at the time of all stop (when all reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, during RT1, when the pattern symbol stops when all reels 31 stop, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 at the time of all stop. The transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or based on the fact that 1BB did not win in the game winning 1BB. Good. In the present embodiment, the game shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB is not won in the game winning 1BB.

The non-internal middle game corresponds to non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3. Further, the internal medium game corresponds to RT4.
Further, during the advantageous section, the slot machine 10 is controlled so that it is basically allowed to stay at RT3. However, if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order of the stop switch 42, etc., it may stay at RT2. is there. In the case of the advantageous section that ends only by one instruction function operation game (excluding the games won by the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group), it is not necessary to stay at RT3. That is, at RT2, one instruction function operation game (except for the small win C group, replay B group, and game won in the replay C group) may be performed to end the advantageous section. Of course, you may make it stay basically at RT3.

In the non-RT, RT1 to RT3 non-internal games, a lottery for the accessory condition device is performed. Then, when 1BB is won in these RTs and 1BB is not won, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal medium game.
In addition, when 1BB is won in the game which is won to 1BB, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB is started at the time of the full stop of the game this time, and therefore RT4 (internal middle game) is not passed in this case.

RT4 continues until the winning 1BB wins. When the RT control means 68 determines that 1BBA or 1BBB is won in RT4, it determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively.
When the 1BBA operation is started, the operation is continued until the 1BBA operation end condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, the operation end condition of 1BBA is set to the number of paid-out sheets exceeding 150.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game and 1BBA operation, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the 1BBA operation end condition. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the next game is controlled to shift to the non-RT.

The same applies to the 1BBB operation. If the operation shifts to the 1BBB operation, the operation is continued until the 1BBB operation end condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the termination condition of the 1BBB operation is set to payout of medals exceeding 200.
The RT control means 68 judges whether or not more than 200 medals have been paid out in each game, and when it is judged that more than 200 medals have been paid out, it is judged that the operation end condition of 1BBB is satisfied, From the next game, it is controlled to shift to RT1.

Note that the replay is not included in the count of 150 or 200 sheets during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 17, the replay D may be won during the 1BB operation, but the automatic bet at the time of winning the replay is not counted in the payout number. Therefore, as the player wins the replay D, the number of games played during 1BB operation increases. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of the replay D during 1BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1BBB operation, so the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is 1BBB operation. It will be more than the expected number of games played.

During the operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, the RB is continuously operated as described above. The RB ends when either one of the two winnings or the two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on condition that the ending condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 during the operation of 1BBA is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. The number of payouts when the small role E2 is won and the small role 36 or 38 is won is two. As a result, the setting 6 has more games than the setting 1 until the end condition (beyond 150 cards) is reached during 1BBA operation. Therefore, during the 1BBA operation in the advantageous section, the expected value of winning the replay D is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so that the probability that the advantageous section is added increases. Details of this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

When the RWM 53 is initialized, the game is started from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and RT may be maintained even when the RWM 53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM 53 is initialized while the winning of 1BB is carried over, the winning of 1BB is also maintained (carried over).

In the non-RT, the RT control means 68 continues the non-RT until the pattern design is displayed. In the non-RT, the small winning combination B group is drawn, and when one of the small winning combination B groups is won and the winning small winning combination is missed, the pattern design is displayed. When the pattern design is displayed in the non-RT, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of the RT is satisfied, and shifts from the next game to RT2.
In RT1, as in non-RT, RT1 is maintained until the pattern pattern is displayed. Then, when the pattern design is displayed at RT1, the process proceeds to RT2.

RT2 is the RT having the highest stay rate in the normal section. At RT2, if the player wins the replay B group and wins the replay 02, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the game shifts from the next game to RT3.
On the other hand, at RT3, the pattern pattern is displayed or the replay C group is won, and the replay 03 is continued until winning. At RT3, when the pattern design is displayed or when the replay 03 is won, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the game is shifted from the next game to RT2.

As described above, in the normal section (and during the non-inside), most of the passengers travel between RT2 and RT3, but the probability of staying in RT2 is highest in terms of probability. When 1BB is won in RT2 or RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the transition from the next game to RT4 (inside) is as described above.

In addition, in the normal section, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT3, in order to maintain RT3, an instruction function at the time of winning the replay C group Is operated to display the correct answer pushing order for winning the replay 01. This prevents the fall to RT2. In addition, when the small winning combination B group is won, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is displayed by operating the instruction function. Similarly, when the small winning combination C group is won, the correct answer pushing order for winning the small winning combination 02 is displayed by operating the instruction function.

On the other hand, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, while operating the above-mentioned instruction function, at the time of replay B group winning, by operating the instruction function, Replay 02 is won. The pressing order is displayed, and control is performed so as to shift to RT3.
Also, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, it shifts to the advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but until the pattern design is displayed, the instruction function In the game that can be operated (for example, when the small winning combination B group is elected), the instruction function is not operated, and waits until the pattern design is displayed. Then, when the pattern design is displayed on the non-RT or RT1 and the process shifts to RT2, the instruction function is operated in the same manner as described above.

The advantageous zone control means 69 is a means for executing transition from a normal zone to an advantageous zone (including a standby zone), determination of whether or not to end the advantageous zone, addition to the advantageous zone, operation control of an instruction function, and the like. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and non-internal medium game.
Further, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to increase the number of games in the advantageous section in the advantage section and non-internal medium games.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, in the lottery by the hand lottery means 61, when a specific condition device is won, whether or not to shift to the advantageous zone during the normal zone is determined as the advantageous zone at the same time. Decide to move. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone, it is limited to the non-inside, and it is not decided to shift from the normal zone to the advantageous zone during the inside.

Further, as described above, when determining the shift to the advantageous section according to the result of the winning combination lottery (the winning condition device), it is not possible to set the winning condition device having a setting difference as a condition.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the normal section may shift to the advantageous section on the condition that the condition device having the common setting is elected.

As shown in FIG. 17, for example, when 1BBA is independently won, there are cases where it is decided to shift to the advantageous section and cases where it is not decided to shift. When a random number included in the range of the register number "20" is extracted from the register number "30" assigned to the single winning of 1BBA, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the register number "10". When a random number value included in the range is extracted, it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. The same applies to the individual winning of “1BBA+small winning combination D”, “1BBA+small winning combination E1”, and small winning combination E1.

In addition, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added in all cases. It should be noted that when these condition devices are won, it is possible not to uniformly add the advantageous section but to carry out the additional lottery, or to carry out the additional lottery or not. However, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, the addition of the advantageous section is performed uniformly.

When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, an advantageous section having a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the end condition of the advantageous section by the number of games, an end condition other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the number of differences, the number of winnings of the small winning group B, the number of times the instruction function is activated, etc.) may be set. Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, it shifts to the advantageous section in which the ending condition is set as described below.
Specifically, for example, the following may be defined.
1BBA single win (number "20"): Initial value counts after the end of 1BB game and shifts to an advantageous zone of 100 games 1BBA + small win D duplicate win (number "5"): initial value 1BB After the end of the game, count and move to the advantageous zone of 250 games 1BBA+small win E1 duplicate winning (number "20"): The initial value counts after the end of 1BB game and shifts to the advantageous zone of 200 games Small Role D When the player wins a single prize (number "50"): Initial value is 150 games advantageous zone Small role E1 is alone when the player wins a number (number "250"): Initial value is 100 games advantage zone, or one small role One of the advantageous sections that ends with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (which may be determined by a lottery, or is included in the range of the number "120" of the number "250") When a random number value is extracted, the initial value is set as an advantageous interval of 100 games, and when a random number value included in the range of the numeral unit "130" is extracted, the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group is selected. It may be an advantageous section that ends with operation)

Since the winning probability of the small role D is lower than the winning probability of the small role E1, the number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small role D is small in order to give a premium feeling when the small role D is won. Role E1 is set more than when winning. The number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small role E1 may be set to be larger than that at the time of winning the small role D.
Also, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous zone, for example, when 1BBA alone is won, the number of games in the advantageous zone is increased by "30", and when the small role E1 alone is won (numerical number "250"). ) Is added to the number of games by "50", and when the small role E1 alone is elected (register "750"), the number of games is added by "20", and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal section, when the small role E1 alone is elected, it is decided to move to the advantageous section with a probability of “1/4” (“250” in all the number “1000”). To do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of middle tier cherries, but the probability of being decided to shift to the advantageous section when the middle tier cherries appear is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6.
That is, even though there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference.
Contrary to the present embodiment, the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 in FIG. 18 may be higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of appearance of the middle cherries, but the lower the probability of determining to move to the advantageous section when the middle cherries appear.
Also, during the advantageous section, when the small role E1 is elected alone, it is always added to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when the small win E2 alone is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle tier cherry, but the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle tier cherry appears is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference even though there is no setting difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added.

In addition, 1BBA is a special combination with a common winning number setting (except when the winning combination of 1BBA and small combination D is won), and 1BBB is a special combination having a setting difference in the winning number.
In this case, when the 1BBA common to the settings is won during the advantageous zone and the 1BBA is in operation, the advantageous zone can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when 1BBB having a setting difference in the advantageous zone is won and 1BBB is in operation, the advantageous zone cannot be added while 1BBB is in operation. When 1BBA and small winning combination D having a set difference in the advantageous zone are elected multiple times and 1BBA is in operation, it is not possible to add to the advantageous zone while 1BBA is in operation.

On the other hand, when the settings 1 and 6 are compared during the operation of 1BBA, the winning probability of the small prize A is lower in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, and the winning probability of the small prize E2 is the setting 1 in the setting 6. Higher than. For this reason, the operation end condition of 1BBA is set to payout of more than 150 cards, and thus the setting 6 has a larger number of games (expected value) during the operation of 1BBA than the setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if Replay D is elected to add an advantageous section, the expected number of times to win Replay D during 1BBA operation is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1, so the higher the setting, the higher the setting. The advantageous section can be easily added.

Further, during the operation of 1BBA, the advantageous section may be set to be added when the number of games reaches a predetermined number.
As described above, during 1BBA operation, setting 6 has a higher expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation than setting 1.
As described above, the operation end condition for 1BBA is set to the fact that more than 150 sheets have been paid out. On the other hand, the expected payout number per game during 1BBA operation is about “8.664” for setting 1 and about “8.557” for setting 6. Therefore, the expected value of the number of games when the payout number reaches 150 is about “17.3” in setting 1 and about “17.5” in setting 6.
Therefore, when the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during 1BBA operation, if it is decided to unconditionally add the advantageous section, the higher the set value, the easier the advantageous section is added. be able to.
Further, during the operation of 1BBA, the advantageous section may be added every time a certain number of games have passed. Also in this way, the higher the set value, the easier it is to carry out the addition of the advantageous section.

On the other hand, 1BBB is a special character having a setting difference, and therefore, it is not possible to add to the advantageous section while 1BBB is operating.
Further, as shown in FIG. 22, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, the operation shifts to the non-RT, and when the operation shifts to the non-RT, the non-RT stays until the pattern design is displayed, and the pattern design is displayed. Shifts to RT2. That is, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, it does not go through RT1.

On the other hand, after the operation of 1BBB ends, the process shifts to RT1 and stays at RT1 until the pattern design is displayed. At RT1, Replay E is selected by lottery, and as shown in FIG. 17, if RT1 is within the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when Replay E is won. As a result, after the operation of 1BBB, the probability of adding to the advantageous section is higher than that after the operation of 1BBA. Then, if the number of additional games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the replay E is set to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance between the end of the 1BBA operation and the end of the 1BBB operation.

Then, when the advantageous section is maintained and the process shifts to RT1, the instruction function is not activated in the game in which the instruction function can be activated (for example, when the small winning combination B group is elected) until the pattern symbol is displayed, and the pattern symbol is displayed. Wait until is displayed. Then, the pattern design is displayed at RT1, and when the process moves to RT2, the instruction function is operated. When the advantageous section is maintained and the game moves to RT1, during the advantageous section, the small winning combination 01 is won by activating the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning group B, and the pattern (unless there is a mistake in the pushing order) No design is displayed. For this reason, when it shifts to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to continue staying at RT1 until the advantageous section ends. Not until the advantageous section ends, until the predetermined number of games, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small winning group B group, and after the predetermined number of games, the instruction function can be operated until the pattern pattern is displayed ( For example, when the small winning combination B group is elected), the instruction function may not be activated and the pattern design may be waited for.

In addition, the advantageous section control means 69 controls to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing when it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, and other than the advantageous section (normal When it is a section or a standby section), the advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off.
The advantageous zone control means 69, firstly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone, after the end of the game decided to shift to the advantageous zone (when all reels 31 are stopped and there is a payout, a medal). The advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit until the medal can be inserted (bet) for the next game after the payout) and before the operation of the settlement switch 46 (the settlement processing operation) is possible when the player has a stored medal. To control.

Secondly, when the transition to the advantageous section is decided based on the winning of the condition device that includes 1BB that can carry over the winning information after the next game, by the time the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is stopped, The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned on.
Therefore, when the transition to the advantageous section is decided based on the winning of the condition device including the special winning combination, for example, the special winning combination is 1BB, 2BB, and RB, and the winning information is carried over to the next game. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped (only when the standby section is provided).

On the other hand, if the special part is a special part that won only in the games that won, such as SB and CB, and the winning information is not carried over to the next game, the condition device that includes only small parts and replays will be selected. As in the case of deciding to shift to the advantageous zone based on the above, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous zone display LED 77 until the next game medal insertion (bet) becomes possible and the settlement switch 46 can be operated. is there.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing timing 1 and timing 2 as timing for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77.
In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone, as the lighting timing of the advantageous zone display LED 77, firstly, "from the time when it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone, after the end of the current game (all The reel 31 is stopped, and when the payout is made, the medal of the next game after the medal payout can be inserted (bet) and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as “predetermined timing”). The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the game start switch 41 is operated next time, the advantageous section starts. That is, in the present embodiment, as a general rule, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous zone starts. With this, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game without knowing it after deciding to shift to the advantageous section.

In FIG. 23, a timing 1 shows an example of this case. In this example, when the small winning combination E1 is won (independently) and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the small winning combination E1, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. As in this example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device in which the winning information does not include 1BB that can be carried over after the next game, it is always applied.

Secondly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes 1BB that can carry over the winning information after the next game, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed. By the time, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is displayed is operated, the advantageous section starts. In the present embodiment, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous zone starts.
In FIG. 23, a timing 2 shows an example of this case. In this example, 1BBA and the small winning combination E1 are won in duplicate, and when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on this overlapping winning, by the time the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the advantageous section is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on. Therefore, up to the moment when the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the lighting timing such as timing 1 may be before that (for example, when the standby section is not provided).

Therefore, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special combination that can carry over the winning information after the next game, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination is uniformly displayed. It may be determined that the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on when it is performed. Alternatively, even if the transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role, it is uniformly decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device not including the special role. Similarly to the case, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing.

Alternatively, when it is determined that the winning information is to be shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role that can be carried over after the next game, the lighting timing may be determined by lottery or the like.
Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device in which the winning information carries the special combination that can be carried over after the next game, other than the timing 1 and the timing 2 shown in FIG. 23, for example, In the next game of the game that wins the special combination, when the start switch 41 is operated, at least a part of the reels 31 is rotating, or the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not there is a winning of the combination). May be

In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section will be started (the standby section will be finished at the next game of the game selected as the special combination). In addition, in the game after the next game of the game won to the special role and the special role can be won, when at least one of the reels 31 rotates when the start switch 41 is operated. It may be in the middle or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won). In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section will be started (the standby section will be ended in the game in which the special part can be won). ).

Here, for example, when the small win E1 is elected, the 59th "red 7"-"cherry"-"red 7" (FIG. 9) in the small win 36 can be stopped. Then, it is assumed that "red 7"-"in rotation"-"red 7" has stopped as a result of pinching in the game at the time of winning 1BBA. Next, when the player aimed at "cherry" when the middle reel 31 was stopped, but "cherry" did not stop on the effective line (kick-off control was performed), the small role E1 was won in the game. You know that not. Then, in this case, if the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player can know that it is a single winning of 1BBA, and the symbol of 1BBA in the next game of the game when 1BBA is won. It becomes possible to push the combination of. That is, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 functions as a 1BBA winning notification. This is because it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of loss (when not winning). Conventionally, when winning 1BB, etc., there is a tendency to give a winning notification of 1BB after performing a continuous effect (an effect that stimulates whether or not 1BB is won), but the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. If the lights are turned on, such a continuous production becomes useless.
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes 1BB that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BB is won. To have.

On the other hand, if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA+small winning combination E1”, if the winning of the small winning combination E1 is prioritized in the game, 1BBA is not won in the playing game.
On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the single winning of the small role E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (because the standby section cannot be provided. ).
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA+small winning role E1”, if the advantageous period displaying LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BBA wins, the small winning role E1 At the time of winning the game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, so that the player knows that 1BBA is not won twice.

Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone based on the winning of “1BBA+small winning combination E1”, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 23) and a predetermined period. The case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has passed (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) is provided. Which of the following is adopted, for example, according to the number of characters when "1BBA + small part E1" is elected or when "1BBA + small part E1" is elected (only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous part) It is possible to cite a lottery (two-stage lottery) as to whether or not the display LED 77 is immediately turned on (whether or not a standby section is provided). As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up by the predetermined timing, it does not mean that 1BBA is not won in duplicate, and the player's expectation can be continued.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small role E1 is set to “PB=1”, and therefore, regardless of whether the “1BBA+small role E1” is won or the small role E1 is won, the small role E1 is always related. The small role E1 (small role 36 or 38) is won in the game.
However, it is also possible to set the small win included in the condition device of the small win E1 to "PB≠1". Then, when the small role included in the condition device of the small role E1 is set to “PB≠1,” when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when “1BBA+small role E1” is elected, the small role E1 is It is also possible to perform control such that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing at the time of winning, but the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even when the predetermined timing has elapsed when the small winning combination E1 is not winning.

However, not limited to the above, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device in which the winning information is carried over after the next game, the advantageous information is always displayed by the predetermined timing. May be turned on (always timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may not always be turned on even after a predetermined timing has passed (always shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when the small winning combination D is independently won and when the small winning combination E1 is independently won, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (a standby section is provided. Cannot be done), so it becomes so-called prompt notification, and it is impossible to fuel the expectations of the player.
Therefore, as described above, when the small winning combination E1 is individually won, there are an advantageous section that continues until the predetermined number of games are exhausted, and an advantageous section that ends with the operation of the instruction function at one small winning group B winning. Provide a type. Then, after turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, until the time when the first small role B group is elected, an effect that fuels the degree of expectation (as a final result, whether or not the advantageous section continues until the predetermined number of games is exhausted) It is possible to keep the player's expectations even after the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. Even if the advantageous zone display LED 77 lights up, it is not known at the time when it lights up whether or not the advantageous zone continues until the predetermined number of games is exhausted.

Even when the small winning role E1 is independently won, if the advantageous section does not move to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up in the first place, so it is not necessary to output a continuous effect (an effect that stimulates whether or not to move to the advantageous section). Absent.
Further, when the above condition device is won, the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group is not set, but it is set as one winning of the small role B group (one instruction function operation game) or a predetermined number of games. It is also possible to determine the number of times of operation by lottery, for example, within the range of 1 to 50 times.

As a specific process for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77, the 8th bit of the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is changed from "0" to "1". Since the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, it is possible to store the data obtained by ORing the segment data up to that point and “10000000” as new data in the RWM 53. As a result, the value corresponding to the segment DP in the digit 2 segment data becomes "1".

Further, as described above, the digit of the present embodiment includes a total of nine digits 1 to 9, and a method of lighting these digits may be the following control.
The main control board 50 executes an "interruption process" every 2.235 ms in parallel with this main process, in addition to the "(game progress) main process" which is a process for repeating each game. In this interruption process, LED lighting control, reel 31 drive control, external signal transmission process, and the like are performed. Then, in the present embodiment, the dynamic lighting is performed on the digits 1 to 9 so that one digit is lit for each interrupt processing. For example, in this interrupt processing, only the digit 1 is turned on, and in the next interrupt processing, the digit 2 is turned on. By repeating this, one digit is turned on at a rate of once every nine interrupt processes. Note that the dynamic lighting is not limited to such dynamic lighting, and static lighting in which a signal line is connected for each digit may be performed.

Therefore, the segment data is changed as described above at the timing of turning on the advantageous section display LED 77. After the change, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up when the lighting timing of the digit 2 comes by the interrupt process.

Further, the advantageous section control means 69, in the game in which the instruction function is to be activated during the advantageous section, operates the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80, which will be described later. The pushing order instruction information is displayed on the display LED 78. For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to the "operation of the instruction function" in this embodiment.

During the advantageous section, the instruction function operation game will be
1) Non-RT and RT1: When winning the small role C group (When winning the small role B group, I want to display the pattern design, so the instruction function does not operate.)
2) RT2: When Replay Group B is elected, Small Role B Group is elected, and Small Role C Group is elected 3) RT3: When Replay C Group is elected, Small Role B Group is elected, and Small Role C Group is elected ..

Further, as described above, when the small winning combination A is won, the instruction function is operated as a dummy. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 wins regardless of the pressing order, so there is no disadvantage to the player no matter which pressing order is specified. It does not hurt your justice.
Specifically, at the time of winning the small winning combination A, it is possible to select one of the pushing order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” by lottery using a random number or the like.

Further, when the small winning combination E1 is won while approaching the upper limit of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone control means 69 selects the pushing order instruction number "A3" and displays the pushing order for the first right stop. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the middle tier cherry from appearing when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached.

In the present embodiment, the advantageous section is added during the winning of the small role E1 and is not added during the winning of the small role E2 in the advantageous section. Therefore, the winning of the small role E2 during the advantageous section is always performed. The right first stop is displayed so that the middle cherry is not displayed. In particular, since the advantage section is always added when the small role E1 is won in the advantage section, it is possible to give the player the impression that the advantage section is added by displaying the middle cherry. Therefore, when it is not desired to display the middle-tier cherry in a game in which the advantageous section is not added (when the small role E2 is won), the right first stop is displayed.

Further, for example, when the approaching upper limit of the advantageous section is not reached (when the advantageous section cannot be added), in order to prevent the middle tier cherry from being displayed, it is determined whether the winning of the small role E1 or the small role E2 is won. Also, the right first stop is displayed by the operation of the instruction function, and the middle cherry is not displayed.

In this embodiment, the upper limit number of games of the advantageous zone is set to "1500 games". Therefore, for example, when the small winning combination E1 (and E2) is won when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section becomes “1400 games” or more, the right first stop is displayed by operating the instruction function. ..
Note that, as described above, the "operation of the instruction function" in the present invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is advantageous to the player, but in the present embodiment, the appearance of the middle-tier cherry is avoided. The display of different pressing sequences is also included in "Actuation of the indicating function". Of course, such a case may not be included in the “operation of the indicating function”, and the pressing order may be displayed only on the image display device 23.

In the present embodiment, an advantageous zone counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided as counters for counting the number of games relating to the advantageous zone (see FIG. 1).
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone counter 69a sets the initial value of the number of games (for example, "100") decided at that time. Then, the count value is decremented each time one game is exhausted, and when it becomes "0", the advantageous section is ended. Note that some of the decrements are performed from the game that has moved to the advantageous section, and some are performed after the end of the 1BB game. Further, the advantageous section counter 69a does not have to set the initial value of the number of games (for example, "100") decided at that time when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and after the 1BB game is over. You may set the initial value.
Further, when the advantageous section is added to the advantageous section, the value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

For example, when the count value of the advantage section counter 69a is "55", it is determined to add the advantage section, and when the number of additional games is "30", the count value is changed from "55" to " 85". Then, each time one game is consumed, the game is decremented by "84", "83"...

Further, when 1BBA is in operation (except for those based on overlapping winning of 1BBA and small winning combination D), the advantageous section counter 69a continues counting, but when 1BBB is in operation, advantageous section counter 69a. Stop counting by. In this embodiment, the setting is made in this manner so that the addition of the advantageous section can be executed during the operation of 1BBA (except the one based on the overlapping winning of 1BBA and the small winning combination D), but the operation of the advantageous section is performed during the operation of 1BBB. Since the addition is not executed, the above-mentioned setting is performed in order to balance the two (in order not to be extremely disadvantageous to the player during the operation of 1BBB in the advantageous section than during the operation of 1BBBA). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous interval counter 69a may continue counting during any operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, or during any operation of 1BBA and 1BBB. The counting by 69a may be interrupted.

On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous section, until the 1BBA or 1BBB is won (inside), the advantageous section counter 69a continues counting. In addition, when winning 1BB or when being notified of winning 1BB, the advantageous interval counter 69a may stop counting at that time. Even when the advantageous interval counter 69a stops counting when the 1BB is won, the remaining number of games in the advantageous period displayed on the image display device 23 is not notified until the 1BB is won. You may make it decrement one game at a time.

In some cases, the condition device that includes 1BB in the normal section is won (e.g., overlapping wins of 1BBA and small winning combination E1), and the advantageous section may be moved based on the winning of the condition device. In this case, the standby section is started from the next game (only when the standby section is provided), and the inside of 1BB is set.
On the other hand, when the condition device in which 1BB is included in the advantageous section is won, it is in the advantageous section and in the inside of 1BB, and the advantageous section is not added in the inside of 1BB in the advantageous section.

Therefore, when the condition device including 1BB is won in the normal section and the transition to the standby section has not yet been made to the advantageous section, a long curling effect (whether or not 1BB is won is notified. It is considered that even if the output is a continuous production over a plurality of games), it is not so disadvantageous to the player. This is because during the standby section, the advantageous section is not in the advantageous section, so that the advantageous section counter 69a does not count (decrement) or the upper limit counter 69b described later does not count (decrement).
On the other hand, when the condition device in which 1 BB is included in the advantageous zone is won and becomes inside, the count (decrement) by the advantageous zone counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b described later are made even after becoming inside. Is counted (decrement). In this case, since it is not possible to add the advantageous section, it is preferable to notify the winning of 1BB early without performing an unnecessarily long fanning effect.
Specifically, for example, the average number of games for the former fanning effect is set to 4 games, and the average number of games for the latter fanning effect is set to 2 games.

On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is individually won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated when the small winning group B is won once, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section counter 69a counts. Do not set the value. In this case, the advantageous section is continued until the small winning combination B group is won, regardless of the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a. Then, when the small winning combination B group is won and the instruction function is operated, it is determined that the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the game this time, and the advantageous section is ended.

In addition, when preliminarily having the number of operations of the instruction function at the time of winning the small role B group as the end condition of the advantageous section, a counter (decrement counter) for counting the number of games at the time of winning the small role B group is provided, and this counter is provided in this counter. You may set "1". When the instruction function is activated once when the small winning group B is won, the count value becomes “0”, and it may be determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.

In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous section by providing something like an advantageous section flag and turning it on during the advantageous section.
However, in the present embodiment, the 8th bit of the digit 2 segment data serves as an advantageous section flag. As described above, when it is determined that the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the game this time, or when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes "0", the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 is "0". ”Is performed.

In addition, when it is decided to independently win the small winning combination E1 and to shift to the advantageous section, it shifts to the advantageous section where the number of games is fixed, or by the operation of the instruction function at one small winning group B winning. A lottery is conducted to determine whether to move to an advantageous section that ends (so-called fake advantageous section). Here, how the probabilities are assigned to the former and the latter is arbitrary.

Then, for example, when it is determined that the small winning combination E1 is independently won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect for inspiring which advantageous section is shifted is output. (You may continue until you win the small role B group). Next, if the small winning combination B group is won, if the advantageous section is completed by activating the instruction function once after the instruction function is activated in the game, the advantageous section is terminated with the current game (advantage). The zone display LED 77 is turned off). On the other hand, when shifting to the advantageous zone of the predetermined number of games, the advantageous zone is continued after the next game (the advantageous zone display LED 77 is kept lit).
In the above example, it is assumed that the small winning combination B group is won before a predetermined number of games have been played since the start of the advantageous section.

Further, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting when the advantageous section is started (when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section or when the advantageous section is started, "1500" is set), and thereafter, the advantageous section is started. Until the end of the section, the count is not interrupted in any case, and the count value is decremented by "1" for each game. Further, for example, the counting is continued even during the 1BB operation. This point is different from the advantageous section counter 69a. The advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may be ones that increment the count value by "1" from "0" for each game.

When the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous section control means 69 determines the advantageous section in the current game even if the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a exceeds "0". Compulsory) ends (the count value of the advantageous period counter 69a is updated to "0"), and the advantageous period display LED 77 is turned off (the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 is updated to "0"). In this way, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is given the highest priority in the advantageous period, and when the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous period is ended even if the 1BB operation is in progress.

Further, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game in which the number of payouts is 9 (the maximum number of payouts in the prescribed number of 3) at least once. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once when the small winning group B is won, but when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the small winning group B is never played. Even if the instruction function operation game is not executed when the group is won, or even if the small winning group B is not won once, the advantageous section is (forced) ended in the game this time, and the advantageous section display LED 77 Turn off.
Further, the number of remaining games or the number of digest games may be displayed as an image on the image display device 23 by referring to the values of the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b.

In FIG. 1, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal to the external centralized terminal board 100. This external signal is, for example, a signal indicating the start of the advantageous zone, the end of the advantageous zone, the start of the 1BB operation, the end of the 1BB operation.
The main control board 50 executes each game and game end check processing, and updates the external signal control number at the time of this game end check processing.
In the present embodiment, the “external signal control number” is a number that takes a different value depending on the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, and the end of the 1BB operation.

Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated so as to have a value corresponding to the external signal control number. Then, after updating the external signal flag, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits the external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52. When this external signal is input to the external centralized terminal board 100, it is transmitted to the hall computer 200. Then, the external signal is output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub control board 80 information (control command) necessary for the performance output by the sub control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are 8-bit 1-byte data, for example. Then, one control command is a pair of the first control command and the second control command. Further, the first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating the parameter (variable).

For example, in the case of the control command indicating RT, the first control command is “33(H)” (00110011(B)) in this embodiment. Further, the RT parameter is “00000001(B)” in the present embodiment when it is RT1, for example. Therefore, the 2-byte data combining these, “00110011/00000001” (“/” indicates between the first control command and the second control command, and is not actually present.) is the RT control command. Is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
Regarding the pressing order instruction number (only in the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, the first control command is the type data and the second control command is the RWM53 as in the case of the above RT. The data stored in.

The control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub control board 80. This is because, for example, when the push order bell is won, there is a risk that the correct push order may be known based on the winning and replay condition device numbers due to fraud. On the other hand, with respect to the accessory condition device number, there is no possibility of the above-mentioned fraudulent acts. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA is won, the accessory condition device number “1” is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

Further, when the condition device having the correct answer pressing order is elected in the advantageous section, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the correct answer pressing order is acquired and stored in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when the condition device that is in the advantageous section and does not have the correct answer push order is won, the push order instruction number is not acquired or stored in the RWM 53. Here, at the start of each game, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is cleared, but the data after the clear is "A0". Therefore, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is "A0" except when the condition device having the correct push order is in the advantageous section and is not elected.
Further, during the normal section or the standby section, even if the condition device having the correct answer pushing order is won, the pushing order instruction number is not acquired or stored in the RWM 53.

Then, at the time of winning the conditional device having the correct answer pressing order in the advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits the pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80.
Further, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits the information "A0" as the pushing order instruction number except when the condition device having the correct pushing order is in the advantageous section except when it is elected.
Furthermore, when it is not in the advantageous zone, the control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the pushing order instruction number to the sub control board 80. It should be noted that it is conceivable that the control command transmitting unit 71 uniformly transmits the push-order instruction number of "A0" when it is not in the advantageous zone. The number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control unit 91.
As described above, the production output control means 91 controls the control commands transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, the RT number, the pushing order instruction number, the production group number, the accessory condition device number, and the like. Based on the command, at what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated or when each stop switch 42 is operated), what kind of effect is to be output (how the lamp 21 is turned on, blinked, or turned off). , What kind of sound is output from the speaker 22, what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 23, etc.) is determined by lottery.

Then, the effect output control unit 91 controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. Further, during the 1BB operation or during the advantageous section, the acquired number, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digest games), etc. are displayed as an image. Further, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when a small winning combination B1 is won in a game in an advantageous zone and a control command corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1" is received, the correct answer push order is "left first stop" or "1-○". Information such as "-○" that allows the player to easily know the correct pressing order is notified. In addition, when the push order instruction number “A0” is received during the advantageous section, the push order is not notified.

Furthermore, it can be said that the control command for the effect group number does not include information on which condition device is actually won, but it includes rough winning information. For example, when the control command corresponding to the effect group number “5” is received, it is not possible to know on the sub-control board 80 side whether the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group is won. .. However, it is possible to know whether the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, or the small winning combination C group has been won. Therefore, it is possible to display a design of "bell" or output effects such as turning on a frame lamp in "yellow" which is a corresponding color of "bell".

Here, when the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 is always won regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. Therefore, immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switch. It is possible to perform a bell (yellow) effect before is operated.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group is won in the normal section, a bell (yellow) effect can be performed when the winning of the small winning combination 01 is confirmed, that is, after the first stop switch 42 is operated. preferable. Of course, it may be after operating the second stop switch 42 or after operating the third stop switch 42.

However, if the output timing of the effect at the time of winning the small role A is different from the output timing of the effect at the time of winning the small role B group or the small role C group, the small role A is selected based on the difference in the timing. Since it is possible to determine whether the winning combination has been won or the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group has been won, it is possible to count the number of winnings of the small winning combination A, and it is possible to estimate the set value.
Therefore, when the small winning combination A is won in the normal section, the output of the bell effect is started at the same timing as the correct answer in the pushing order when the small winning group B or the small winning group C is won, for example, immediately after the first stop switch 42 is operated. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to determine which one of the small combination A, the small combination B group, and the small combination C group is won. In particular, in the present embodiment, when one of the small combination A, the small combination B group, or the small combination C group is won, the control command corresponding to the same effect group number “5” is transmitted. .. In this way, the effect group numbers of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group are set to be the same (“5”), and the sub control board 80 side that has received the effect group number is, for example, the first stop switch. If it is designed to output the effect immediately after the operation of 42, the effect group numbers of the small winning combination A, the small winning combination B group, and the small winning combination C group are made different (“5” to “7”). Design that is more efficient than the case (in the latter case, when any production group number of "5" to "7" is received, the production is output at the timing immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42, for example. Inefficiency because it has to be designed to).

24 and 25, the timing of transmitting the control command of the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, and the display of the push order instruction information by the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function (on the main side) 2))), and the notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device 23 (notification on the sub side). 24 and 25, four examples 1 to 4 are shown.
In FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, first, when the player operates the start switch 41, the role lottery means 61 performs the lottery of the condition device, and the effect group number corresponding to the won condition device is determined. Further, when it is in the advantageous zone, the push order instruction number corresponding to the selected condition device is determined.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a control command for the pressing order instruction number (only in the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number to the sub control board 80. If the sub-control board 80 is in the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. On the other hand, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number by the operation of the instruction function during the advantageous period.

In the “example 1” of FIG. 24, when the push order instruction number is determined, the push order instruction information is first displayed by the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50. After that, the pushing order instruction number is transmitted, and then the performance group number and the accessory condition device number are transmitted. Next, the sub-control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated upon receiving the accessory condition device number, and notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. The display of the pressing order instruction information and the notification of the correct pressing order are both performed before the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation.

Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct answer pressing order is the so-called three selection (first stop), the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated to notify the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23. I'm trying. On the other hand, for example, when the correct answer pressing order is so-called 6-option, the image display device 23 notifies the correct answer pressing order until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. Note that, as in the present embodiment, even if the correct pressing order is so-called three-choice, it is needless to say that the correct pressing order may be continuously notified until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. is there.

In the present embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 as described above, and the sub control board 80 receives this control command. Therefore, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device 23 is ended. It goes without saying that effects other than the correct answer pressing order, for example, image display (character display, etc.) peculiar to the advantageous section is continued.

Further, the display of the push order instruction information by the acquired number display LED 78 is until the main control board 50 makes a winning determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the correct answer pressing order is three selections as in the present embodiment, the pressing order instruction information may be displayed until the first stop switch 42 is operated.
The display of the acquired number display LED 78 after the pressing order instruction information is displayed is "00" (the upper digit and the lower digit display "0"), "*0" (the upper digit is off (*), and the lower digit is " “0” is displayed), “**” (higher digits and lower digits are turned off), “−−” (both upper digits and lower digits are turned on only in the segment G), and the like.

In “Example 2” of FIG. 24, after the push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function, and then the effect group is displayed. The number and the accessory condition device number are transmitted. After receiving the effect group number and the accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order.

Further, in “Example 3” of FIG. 25, after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number, the production group number, and the accessory condition device number, the sub control board 80 displays the correct pressing order on the image display device 23. Then, the main control board 50 displays the pushing order instruction information by the operation of the instruction function at the moment (or immediately before) at which the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed. In Examples 1 and 2 described above, the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of the push order instruction information) is performed at a timing earlier than the notification of the correct push order by the sub control board 80. .. On the other hand, in the example 3, the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub control board 80 is performed at a timing earlier than the operation of the instruction function (display of the pressing order instruction information) by the main control board 50.

In “Example 4” of FIG. 25, the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of the pressing order instruction information) and the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the sub control board 80 are performed at substantially the same timing. .. In the case of controlling in this way, for example, after the “N” ms has elapsed since the push order instruction number or the accessory condition device number was transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, the instruction function is activated (the push order instruction The display of information is started), and the sub-control board 80 controls to start the notification of the correct pressing order after “N” ms has elapsed after receiving the pressing order instruction number or the accessory condition device number. It can be mentioned.

Although FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 show four examples, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) is preferably performed after the start switch 41 is operated and before the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed. .. Further, it is preferable that the sub-control board 80 informs the pushing order after the operation of the instruction function on the main control board 50 side. By setting in this way, when the main control board 50 sends an incorrect push order instruction number to the sub control board 80, or when the sub control board 80 notifies the push order different from the received push order instruction number. Even in such a case, since the push order instruction information is already displayed by the main control board 80, the player will notice an error in the notification by the sub control board 80 and the player will not be disadvantaged. Absent.
Further, the operation of the instruction function (display of the pushing order instruction information) on the main control board 50 side is performed until the winning determination, but may be performed until the third reel 31 is stopped.

Next, the case where the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) and the notification of the correct push order are performed will be described more specifically. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a game flow (flow from top to bottom in the figure), display of the acquired number display LED 78, and notification example of the image display device 23. The example of FIG. 26 is the timing corresponding to “example 1” of FIG.

In the instruction function operation game in the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 activates the instruction function to display the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78. The example of FIG. 26 shows an example in which the small winning combination B1 is won. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A1”, that is, “=1”.
Then, before the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order. The example of FIG. 26 shows an example in which "1○○" is displayed.

Next, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, when the correct answer pressing order is entered, the image display device 23 directs that the pressing order is correct. Is output (correct answer production). On the other hand, when the push order is incorrect, the image display of the correct push order is erased.
In the present embodiment, since the pressing order correct answer/incorrect answer is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification (image display) regarding the correct answer pressing order is ended. In the case of 6 options, it is possible to keep informing the correct pressing order until the second stop switch 42 is operated or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

Further, in the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (display of the pushing order instruction information) continues to be displayed until the winning determination is made (the same applies to the example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the instruction function (display of the acquired number display LED 78) may be terminated, for example, at the time when the incorrect pressing order is reached, similarly to the notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device 23. .. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct answer pressing order is three choices, an instruction is given when the first stop switch 42 is operated (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order). The operation of the function may be terminated.

However, it is desirable to end the operation of the instruction function after stopping the notification by the image display device 23. This is to prevent the push order notification from being performed on the sub control board 80 side, even though the instruction function is not operated on the main control board 50 side. However, of course, the operation of the indicating function may be ended at the same time as the end of the notification by the image display device 23, or the operation of the indicating function may be ended before the end of the notification by the image display device 23.

Of course, even if the pressing order is incorrect, the image display device 23 may continue to be notified of the correct pressing order.
However, if the pressing order notification by the image display device 23 is stopped at the time when the pressing order is incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

When all the reels 31 are stopped, winning determination is performed. Here, when the small prize 01 is won and 9 medals are paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 indicates that 9 medals have been paid out from the display "=1" of the pushing order instruction information. It changes to "09" shown. It should be noted that when a single winning combination is won due to a mistake in the pushing order or the like, "01" is displayed, and when a winning combination is missed, "00" (or "**") is displayed. It should be noted that from the display of the pushing order instruction information "=1" to the display of the number of medals payout "09", "=1"→"00" (in order to reset the display, "00" is displayed. )→“09” may be displayed.

Alternatively, “=1”→“**” (in order to reset the display, the upper and lower digits are turned off)→“09” may be displayed.
Further, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or cares and inserts the medals and the medals are bet, the contents of the acquired number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 are cleared, so that the display content is changed to "00". Allow (“**” may be used).

In FIG. 1, the management information control unit 72 is a unit that controls (stores, calculates, displays, etc.) the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74.
In this embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is
(1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative)
(2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(3) Role ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(4) Percentage of consecutive role goods (cumulative)
(5) Role ratio (cumulative)
No. 5 (see FIG. 38 described later).

First, the "advantageous section ratio (ratio of staying in the advantageous section)" means the ratio of the advantageous section to all the gaming sections (normal section+standby section+advantageous section). Percentage). For example, in the game section of "10000" games, when the number of games of the advantageous section is "7000", the advantageous section ratio is "70 (%)".
Further, in the present embodiment, one set is "400" game times. Then, the total of 15 sets, that is, "6000" number of games is set as "total", and each ratio at the "6000" number of games is calculated.

Furthermore, the "total" refers to the total sum of the numerical values that have been kept counted until then, and in the present embodiment, it is counted for the purpose of at least "175000" game times or more. When the cumulative total is less than the number of "175000" games, the cumulative value is displayed by, for example, blinking display, and when the total number of games is "175000" or more, the cumulative value is displayed by, for example, lighting display. The cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit value) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 even after the number of times of playing the “175000” or more.

The "continuous winning character ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the type 1 special character (RB) is activated to the total number of medals acquired. Therefore, in the present embodiment, "it indicates the number of medals obtained during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of medals obtained.
For example, when the number of medals acquired in the "6000" number of games is "2000", and the number of medals acquired during operation of the "first-class special accessory (RB)" is "500", "continuous winning combination" The object ratio (6000 games) is "25 (%)".

Further, the "feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of medals obtained during the operation of the feat to the total number of medals obtained. Here, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special character, "character part" means a second-class special character (CB), 2BB (second-class character product continuous operation device, CB continuously operates), SB. (Single bonus) is included.
Further, in the present embodiment, since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided, the accessory ratio becomes the same value as the continuous accessory ratio.

27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modified example of FIG. 29) are diagrams showing a part of the storage area of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. In the figure, the 4-digit numerical value starting from "F" indicates the address of the RWM 53. A buffer (storage area) for 1-byte (8-bit) data is provided for each address.

First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer for storing data regarding the advantageous section. As information about the advantageous section, there are three storage areas of an advantageous section game number corresponding value, total number of games, and advantageous section ratio. Then, the storage area for the advantageous interval game count corresponding value is 4 bytes (“F004” to “F001”), and the storage area for the total game count is 3 bytes (“F007” to “F005”). The storage area of is 1 byte (“F008”).

In the present embodiment, the total number of games is updated so that the value of the total number of games is incremented by "+1" every time one game is consumed.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, every time one game is consumed, the value obtained by multiplying the value of the number of advantageous section games by 100 (referred to as "advantageous section game number corresponding value") is updated. Therefore, a storage area of 3 bytes is provided for the total number of games, and a storage area of 4 bytes is provided for the value corresponding to the number of advantageous zone games.

In this embodiment, the total number of games is to be stored at least "175000" times or more. This is for displaying the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio when the total number of games is “175,000” or more.
Here, since "175000(D)" is a binary number of "18" digits, it can be stored in 3 bytes of "24" digits.

Further, assuming that all of the total number of games “175000 (D)” is an advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is “175000×100” (D), and this value is “25 digits in binary. Therefore, 3 bytes of “24” digits are not enough, but 4 bytes of “32” digits can be stored.
For the above reason, the storage area for the total number of games is set to 3 bytes, and the storage area for the advantageous interval game number corresponding value is set to 4 bytes.

The total number of games is incremented by "1" for each game, but is not limited to this, and a number other than "1" (a value corresponding to the total number of games) is incremented. Good.
On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio is "100 (D)" at the maximum value, and since the value is a binary "7" digit, it can be stored with a storage capacity of 1 byte.

When the total number of games continues to be updated for each game and the number of games, and the storage area of 3 bytes reaches the upper limit value (3 bytes full, that is, “FFFFFF(H)”, about 167.8 million in decimal), Counting ends at that point, and the number of games is not updated from the next game.
The value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is incremented by "+100" for each game during the advantageous section, but even if all games are assumed to be advantageous sections, the total number of games becomes 3 bytes full. It is possible to count up to. When the count of the total number of games is finished, the count of the advantageous zone game number corresponding value is also finished.

The advantageous zone ratio is a value calculated by “the advantageous zone game number corresponding value/total game number” (as will be described later, actual subtraction is performed, not division). The value corresponding to the number of advantageous-zone games is a value obtained by multiplying the number of advantageous-zone games by 100, so that the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. The main CPU 55 of the present embodiment uses an assembler, cannot handle the decimal point, and cannot perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes. Therefore, the above-described arithmetic method should be adopted. It is possible to calculate by.
In the present embodiment, the advantageous interval ratio is stored as an integer, and the fractional part is truncated. For example, when the total number of games is “1100 (D)” and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is “56000 (D)”, the advantageous section ratio is “50 (D)”, and “F008” shows “ 00110010(B)” is stored.

Further, the advantageous section ratio can be updated for each game, but for example, when there is a request to display the advantageous section ratio, the advantageous section ratio is calculated from the advantageous section game number corresponding value and the total number of games, It may be stored in “F008”. Then, the decimal value based on the value stored in "F008" is displayed as the advantageous interval ratio.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a buffer that stores data regarding the total payout number. When the medals are paid out by winning the small winning combination, the values stored in the predetermined storage areas of the RWM 53 are updated.
As shown in FIG. 28, a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas (01 set to 15 sets) of 2-byte data (for example, “F012 (higher digit)” and “F011 (lower digit)”) is provided.
The number of payouts for 400 games is stored in each 2-byte data. For example, when a winning combination of 9 coins is awarded and 9 coins are paid out, "9(D)" is added to the total number of coins paid out.
Here, in the slot machine according to the rule, the maximum payout number in one game is determined to be "15" or less, and assuming that there are 15 payouts in each game, "6000" in 400 games. Becomes Since "6000 (D)" has 13 digits in binary number, it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Further, from the first game to the 400th game, when the payout is made, the payout number is stored in the 01st set (“F012” and “F011”). From the 401st game to the 800th game, the payout number is stored in the 02nd set (“F014” and “F013”).
In this way, 400 games are set as one set and values are stored in different buffers for each set.

Further, a storage area (3 bytes) for the total payout number of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided ("F031" to "F02F" in FIG. 28). This storage area is for storing 15 sets, that is, the total payout number for 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 coins have been paid out in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store up to the value of "90000 (D)", but since "90000 (D)" is 17 digits in binary number, It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first 15th set, the total number of payouts for the number of games less than 6000 games is stored in "F031" to "F02F".
When the 6000th game is reached, since the payout number for 400 games is stored in all the 01st to 15th sets (2 bytes each), the total payout number for the 15 sets (6000 games) is also stored. In addition, it becomes the total value for 6000 games.
Next, when moving to the 6001st game, the 2-byte data (“F012” and “F011”) of the 01st set is cleared, and the total number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is stored in this buffer. Go In addition, from the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the total payout number (3 byte data) of the total of 15 sets is maintained without being changed.

Then, the 6400th game is reached, and when the addition to the 01-byte 2-byte data is completed, the total payout number for the 15-set is calculated (addition of 2-byte data for each of the 01-th to 15-th sets), The calculated total payout number for 15 sets is updated.
Similarly to the above after 6401 game, when moving to 6401 game, clear the 2-byte data (“F014” and “F013”) of the 02nd set, and in this buffer, 6401 game to 6800 game The total number of payouts up to is stored.
The total payout number for 15 sets is updated every 400 games in the above method, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total payout number for 15 sets is calculated, You may update to that value.

The total payout number (cumulative) (“F034” to “F032”) is a 3-byte storage area for storing the cumulative total of the payout number. The cumulative total of the number of payouts is calculated in order to calculate each ratio when the number of games is 175,000 or more (such as a continuous accessory operating ratio described later). However, this cumulative payout number continues to be stored even after the 175,000 games have passed, and when the storage capacity of this 3 bytes reaches the upper limit value (3 bytes full), the update is terminated.
Assuming that 155,000 medals have been paid out for each game of 175,000 times, the number of binary digits is 22 and therefore the memory capacity is 3 bytes.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a buffer of the RWM 53, which stores data relating to the number of payouts for continuous winnings.
As shown in FIG. 29, a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas each consisting of 3-byte data (for example, the 01st set is “F043 (most significant digit)” to “F041 (least significant digit)”) is provided. ..

Then, in each 3-byte data, a value obtained by multiplying the number of paid-out medals by 100 at the time of operating the continuous winning object by 100 (hereinafter referred to as "a paid-out number corresponding value") is stored. For example, when 10 winning combinations are won and 10 payouts are made when the continuous winning combination is operated, the payout amount corresponding value is “+1000”.
It should be noted that the reason why the value multiplied by 100 is stored instead of the value of the number of payouts itself is the same as the value corresponding to the number of advantageous zone games, and when the continuous accessory ratio is calculated later, the ratio is an integer. This is because it is calculated.

Further, in each 3-byte data, a payout number corresponding value at the time of operating a continuous winning effect for 400 games is stored. Specifically, from the 1st game to the 400th game, when there is a payout number at the time of continuous accessory operation, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 01st set (“F043” to “F041”) To do. For the next 401st to 800th games, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 02nd set (“F046” to “F044”).
In this way, 400 games are set as one set and values are stored in different buffers for each set.
Assuming that 15 medals are paid out in each game in 400 games in succession, the payout number corresponding value is "600,000 (D)", which is 20 digits in binary number, so 3 bytes Can be stored in.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) for the total payout number corresponding to 15 sets (6000 games) of continuous winning action is provided (“F070” to “F06E”). This storage area is a storage area for storing 15 sets, that is, a payout number corresponding value during 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 coins are paid out in each game in 6000 games, the payout number corresponding value is "9000000 (D)", and since this value is 24 digits in binary number, it is 3 bytes. It is memorable.

For example, up to the first fifteenth set, "F070" to "F06E" store values corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out at the time of continuous winning action in the number of games less than 6000 games. Then, when the 6000th game is reached, the payout number corresponding value between 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st to 15th sets (3 bytes each). Further, the corresponding value for the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is operated for a total of 15 sets (6000 games) is the total value for 6000 games.
Then, when moving to the 6001st game, the 01st set of 3-byte data (“F043” to “F041”) is cleared, and the number of payouts at the time of continuous winning combination operation from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is cleared in this buffer. Memorize corresponding values. In addition, from the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the value corresponding to the number of paid-out coins at the time of continuous accessory operation of 15 sets is maintained without being changed.

Then, it becomes the 6400th game, and when the 3-byte data of the 01st set is confirmed, the total corresponding payout number value for the 15 consecutive sets is calculated (the 3-byte data for each of the 01st set to the 15th set is calculated. Addition), and the calculated corresponding value for the number of paid-out coins during continuous accessory action for 15 sets is updated.

In the same manner as above for the 6401th game and thereafter, when shifting to the 6401th game, the 3rd byte data (“F046” to “F044”) of the 02nd set is cleared and the 6401th to 6800th games are stored in this buffer. Up to, the 3-byte data of the 02nd set is updated.
In addition, the value corresponding to the number of payouts during continuous accessory work for a total of 15 sets is updated every 400 games in the above method, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total of 15 sets is continuous. You may calculate and update the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the accessory is activated.

The cumulative value corresponding to the number of payout coins during continuous accessory operation (“F074” to “F071”) is a storage area for storing the cumulative total of the corresponding values corresponding to the number of payout coins during continuous auditory product operation. Is for calculating the continuous winning accessory operation ratio when the number of games is 175,000 or more. However, the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payout coins during continuous accessory operation continues to be stored even after the 175,000 games have elapsed, and the update ends when the storage capacity of 4 bytes reaches the upper limit value (4 bytes full).
If it is assumed that 15 medals continue to be paid out in each game, each game "1500 (D)" continues to be added, and thus 4 bytes can store up to about 2.86 million games.

In addition, the continuous winning action rate (6000 games) (“F075”) is the value corresponding to the payout number corresponding to the continuous winning action of 6000 games (“F070” to “F06E”)/total payout number of 6000 games (FIG. 28). It is a buffer for storing the values of "F031" to "F02F").

Further, the continuous accessory action ratio (cumulative) (“F076”) is calculated as “cumulative continuous accessory action-time payout number corresponding value (“F074” to “F071”)/cumulative total payout number (“F034” in FIG. 28). To "F032").
As for the above ratio, since the maximum value "100(D)" is stored in decimal, it can be stored in 1 byte.
It should be noted that the continuous accessory operation ratio (6000 games) and the continuous accessory operation ratio (cumulative) can be updated for each game, but for example, calculation is performed when there is a request to display these ratios. The calculation result may be stored in each storage area (“F075” or “F076”) and the value may be displayed.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a buffer of the RWM 53, which stores data relating to the number of payouts of a winning combination. As is clear from comparison between FIG. 30 and FIG. 29, a buffer for storing the payout number corresponding value of the winning combination is provided as well as a buffer for storing the payout number corresponding value of the continuous winning combination. The buffer for storing the payout number corresponding value of the winning combination has the same structure as the buffer for storing the payout number corresponding value of the continuous winning combination.

That is, for each 400 games, a storage area for 15 sets capable of storing 3 bytes of data as a payout number corresponding value at the time of operating the accessory, and a value corresponding to the payout number at the time of operating the accessory of 6000 games (15 sets) in total. It is provided with a 3-byte buffer for storing and a 4-byte buffer for storing a cumulative value corresponding to the number of payout coins when the accessory is activated. Further, as a buffer (1 byte) for storing the accessory operation ratio, two types are provided, one for 6000 games and the other for cumulative total.
The storage method in each of these buffers is the same as that in the operation of the continuous accessory, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Since the continuous winning effect corresponds to 1BB (including RB) of the present embodiment, when medals are paid out during the operation of 1BB, it is stored in the value corresponding to the payout number when the continuous winning effect is activated as shown in FIG.
When the medals are paid out during the operation of all the winning effects including the continuous winning effects, the winning effects are stored in the bonus-value-at-acting-functions payout number corresponding value shown in FIG.
Here, in the present embodiment, only 1BB (and RB), which are continuous winning effects, are provided as the winning effects, so in such a case, the values stored in the buffer shown in FIG. The value stored in the buffer shown in is the same value.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modification of the ring buffer, and in this example, a modification of FIG. 29 is shown.
In FIG. 29, ring buffers each consisting of 3 bytes of the 01st to 15th sets are provided, and the total value of 15 sets is stored.
On the other hand, the example of FIG. 31 is similar to FIG. 29 in that the total value of 15 sets is calculated, but 16 sets are provided as ring buffers.

In FIG. 31, from the 1st game to the 6000th game, the payout number corresponding value is stored in each 3 bytes of 01 to 15 sets, which is the same as in FIG.
Here, when it is desired to calculate the total payout amount corresponding value for the first game to the 6,000th game, each 3-byte data of 01 to 15 sets is added and calculated.

Next, the payout amount corresponding values from the 6001st game to the 6400th game are stored in the 16-th set 3-byte buffer (“F070” to “F06E”).
Then, when it comes to the 6401 game, the 3-byte data (“F043” to “F041”) of the 01 set is cleared, and the payout amount corresponding value from the 6401 game to the 6800 game is changed to the 01 set of 3-byte data. I will remember.

When calculating the total payout amount corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets) between the 6401th game and the 6800th game, each 3-byte data of 02 sets to 16 sets is added and calculated.
Further, when the 6800th game is reached, when calculating the total payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets), each set of 3 bytes of data is added and calculated.
In this way, the 3-byte buffer of any one of the 16 sets is set as the 3-byte buffer currently being updated, and the other 15 sets of 3-byte buffers are used to calculate the payout amount corresponding value of the 15 sets in total. Used when doing.

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is not initialized only by turning on/off the power switch 11, and the data is maintained.
Even when the predetermined storage area is initialized (when the RAM is cleared) when the setting is changed, the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is an exception to the initialization and the data is maintained without being initialized. It Here, in order to shift to the setting change mode, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 11 under the situation where the setting key switch 12 is turned on (rotated 90 degrees to the right) when the power switch 11 is off. It becomes possible to transfer. Further, the initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of changing the setting described above is executed before the setting value can be changed (setting changing mode) based on the operation of the setting switch 13.

However, when the non-recoverable error occurs, the data is initialized when the error is recovered. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the data is not initialized and is maintained.
Here, the “non-recoverable error” refers to a serious error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the above-described operation for shifting to the setting change mode is performed. For example,
1) If the read setting value is not within the range of settings 1 to 6 (setting value error),
2) As a result of determining the stop symbol, if a symbol that should not be displayed (kicking symbol) is displayed (symbol combination error),
3) Update error of random number judged for each interrupt processing,
4) When power recovery data is not a normal value, etc.

When a non-recoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, the predetermined range of the RWM 53 (data of each buffer in FIG. 27 to FIG. 30, setting value information, RT information, selected condition device information) is cleared. Then, the set value is set, and if there is no other error, the restoration process is performed.

On the other hand, the “recoverable error” refers to an error that can be recovered without turning on/off the power switch 11. Examples thereof include a medal clogging error, a medal retention error, an illegal medal passing error, an abnormality of the passage sensor 43a, an abnormality of the insertion sensor 44, an abnormality of the payout sensor 37, and an abnormality insertion error of a medal.
When a recoverable error occurs, the content of the error is displayed and the main process is stopped. However, if the hall clerk performs an error canceling operation (eliminating the cause of the error) and operates the reset switch 14, the error is canceled. If it is determined that the error is cleared, the process is restarted.

Next, the update processing of the advantageous zone game count correspondence value and the total game count will be described. In the following flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 37, the advantageous-zone game count corresponding value is abbreviated as “advantageous-zone corresponding value”.
FIG. 32 is an example of updating the advantageous period game count correspondence value and the total game count using the register. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the portion surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 32, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of the portion surrounded by the dotted line, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 3 of a part. In addition, FIG. 36 is an example of updating the advantageous section game number corresponding value and the total game number without using the register.

FIG. 32 is executed at each game, for example, at the end of the game. Further, in the method using registers, the chip of this embodiment can use A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (7 registers) at the time of calculation. In particular, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous zone games (“F004” to “F001”) is 4 bytes, and the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) is 3 bytes, so that the total is 7 bytes, which can be used. The number of registers matches the number of bytes.

32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte of the total number of games (data of "F007" in FIG. 27) is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games (data of "F006" and "F005" in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register.
Furthermore, in step S103, the upper 2 bytes (data of "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27) of the advantageous period game count corresponding value are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, the lower 2 bytes (data of "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27) of the advantageous period game count corresponding value are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the lower 2 byte register of the total number of games, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether or not a digit overflow has occurred in the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games by adding "1" in step S105. For example, if the data of the lower 2 bytes is "FFFF(H)" before the start of this flowchart, an overflow occurs due to the addition of "1" in step S105 (a flag register (F register incorporated in the main CPU 55). ) Carry flag becomes "1"). When it is determined that a digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S107, and when it is determined that no digit overflow has occurred (carry flag≠“1”), the process proceeds to step S109. After adding "1" in step S105, it is determined in step S106 whether a digit overflow has occurred. Therefore, at the time of step S106, the DE register value when the digit overflow occurs is "0". It has become.
In this embodiment, the "0"th bit of the F register (flag register) is set as the carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that becomes “1” when a carry-down occurs or a carry (also referred to as a carry-over) occurs by the operation using the register.

In step S107, "1" is added to the total number of games upper 1 byte register, that is, the A register value in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, the “upper limit” means the upper limit of counting. Since the total number of games played in this embodiment is counted in 3 bytes, when 3 bytes are full, specifically when the value is "FFFFFF(H)", no further addition is possible. , Determine that the upper limit has been reached. It should be noted that it is determined that the upper limit has been reached after adding "1" to the A register value in step S107 when the A register value actually overflows (when the carry flag is "1"). is there. In addition, it can be paraphrased when the A register value becomes “0” (when the zero flag=“1”). When it is determined that the upper limit is reached, the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

Therefore, when the total number of games in the present embodiment is full of 3 bytes and the decimal number is about 16,780,000 times, the total number of games is not added any further. However, even when 3 bytes are full, the game of FIG. 32 is executed for each game, but each game is determined to be “Yes” in step S108 and the present flow chart is ended.

When the process proceeds from step S106 or step S108 to step S109, it is determined whether or not the current game is in the advantageous zone. It is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous zone by providing an advantageous zone flag that is turned on during the advantageous zone and determining whether the advantageous zone flag is on or off. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section by determining whether or not the 8th bit of the segment data of digit 2 is “1”. Is.
When it is determined in step S109 that it is in the advantageous zone, the process proceeds to step S110, and when it is determined that it is not in the advantageous period, the advantage period game number corresponding value is not updated and the process proceeds to step S114.

In step S110, "100(D)" is added to the lower 2 byte register value of the advantageous period game count corresponding value, that is, the HL register value in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S111, and it is determined whether a digit overflow has occurred. In the present embodiment, since "100(D)" is added during the advantageous period, overflow occurs in 2 bytes because "FFDC(H) (65500(D))" is "100(D)". )” is added, resulting in “0040(H)(65600(D))”. When it is determined that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112, and when it is determined that the digit overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S112, "1" is added to the upper 2 byte register of the advantageous period game count corresponding value, that is, the BC register in this example. Then, proceeding to step S113, the updated BC register value and HL register value are written to "F004" to "F001" in FIG. As a result, the advantageous zone game count correspondence value (RWM53) is updated. Further, in the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written in "F007" to "F005" in FIG. As a result, the total number of games played (RWM53) is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In the flowchart of FIG. 32, the advantageous-zone game count corresponding value does not become 4 bytes full before the total game count reaches 3 bytes full. As described above, the total number of games can be counted about 16,780,000 times, but assuming that all the total number of games is an advantageous section, and multiplying the value of about 16,780,000 by 100, This is because it does not reach 4 bytes full. Therefore, in step S112, even if "1" is added to the high-order 2 byte register value of the advantageous interval game count corresponding value, correct arithmetic processing can be realized without determining whether a digit overflow has occurred. It becomes possible to realize simplification of the arithmetic processing.

Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, each data of the RWM 53 is set (copied) in the register to execute the calculation, and when it is determined in step S108 that the total number of games reaches the upper limit, the total number of games is set. The process according to this flowchart is ended without returning the set register value to the RWM 53. Therefore, the total number of games stored in the RWM 53, that is, the 3-byte data stored in “F007” to “F005” of the RWM 53 remains “FFFFFF(H)” and before and after the start of this flowchart. There is no change in the total number of games played.

Next, a specific example of the processing of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. 32 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the steps during this period. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as those in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 33, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.

After step S112, if the process proceeds to step S121, the value of the upper 2 bytes of the advantageous period game number corresponding value is updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written in "F004" and "F003" in FIG. In the next step S122, the value of the lower 2 bytes of the advantageous zone game count corresponding value is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written in “F002” and “F001” in FIG.
Next, proceeding to step S123, the total number of games is updated collectively for 3 bytes. Specifically, the A register value and the DE register value are written in “F007”, “F006”, and “F005” in FIG. 27, respectively.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 34, steps S109 to S112 are the same as those in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 33, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.
After step S112, if the process proceeds to step S131, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous zone games is updated in batch for 4 bytes. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are written in “F004”, “F003”, “F002”, and “F001” in FIG. 27, respectively. Then, when the process proceeds to step S123, the total number of games is updated in a batch for 3 bytes as in the first specific example.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 of FIG. Note that in FIG. 35, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S141.
Each step of FIG. 35 is the same as that of FIG. In FIG. 35, the point different from FIG. 34 is that even when it is determined in step S109 that the advantage section is not in operation, the procedure proceeds to step S131, and the advantage section game count correspondence value is updated. That is, in this case, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous zone games is not added by "100(D)", but based on the BC register value and the HL register value set in step S103 and step S104 in FIG. 27, in "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001". In this case, the same value as in the previous game is written again.

The above examples of FIGS. 32 to 35 are examples in which the total game number and the advantageous period game number corresponding value are updated (using) via the register.
On the other hand, FIG. 36 is an example of updating the total number of games and the advantageous zone game number corresponding value without using a register in principle.
In FIG. 36, in step S201, "1" is added to the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played. Specifically, in FIG. 27, “1” is added to the data of “F006” and “F005”.

In the next step S202, it is determined whether a digit overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, it is determined whether or not the carry flag becomes "1" by adding "1" to the data of "F006" and "F005". It should be noted that the determination may be made based on whether or not the data of “F006” and “F005” becomes “0000 (H)”. When it is determined that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203, and when it is determined that the digit overflow has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S203, "1" is added to the upper 1 byte of the total number of games played. Specifically, in FIG. 27, “1” is added to the data of “F007”. In the next step S204, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. The determination here is that by adding "1" in step S203, a carry overflow occurs in "F007" and the carry flag becomes "1", and the carry flag becomes "1". When it hits, it is judged that the upper limit has been reached. Note that it may be determined whether or not the data of “F007” has become “0 (H)”, and when it has become “0 (H)”, it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached. When it is determined that the upper limit is reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and when it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the upper 1 byte of the total number of games. When the process proceeds to step S205, an overflow occurs in the upper 1 byte in the addition in step S203, and the value is "0 (H)". The data before adding "1", that is, "FF(H)" is restored.
Next, proceeding to step S206, "1" is also subtracted from the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played. As a result, the values of “F006” and “F005” become “FFFF(H)”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

On the other hand, if the process proceeds from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. This determination is similar to step S109 of FIG. When it is determined that the advantageous zone is not in play, it is not necessary to update the value of the advantageous zone game count, so the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the vehicle is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S208. In step S208, "100(D)" is added to the lower 2 bytes of the advantageous zone game count corresponding value, that is, "F002" and "F001" in FIG. Here, since the assembler cannot directly add the value “100(D)” to the RWM 53, first, the data “F002” and “F001” are stored in the HL register. Then, the result of adding the value of “100(D)” to the HL register is stored in “F002” and “F001” to update the data of “F002” and “F001”.

In the next step S209, it is determined whether a digit overflow has occurred in the calculation of step S208. Here, it is determined whether or not the carry flag becomes "1", and when the carry flag becomes "1", it is determined that an overflow has occurred.

When it is determined in step S209 that a digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210, and when it is determined that a digit overflow has not occurred, the processing according to this flowchart ends. In step S210, "1" is added to the upper 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous zone games, that is, "F004" and "F003" in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

Next, the calculation process of the advantageous zone ratio will be described.
In the present embodiment, since the total number of games and the corresponding value of the advantageous section game number are stored, in order to calculate the advantageous section ratio, simply, "the advantageous section game number corresponding value/total number of games" It can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, a chip satisfying the rules can only perform an operation in 2 bytes, and cannot execute a division of a numerical value of 2 bytes or more. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the following subtraction.

Specifically, when the value corresponding to the number of advantageous zone games=x and the total number of games=y, “x÷y” can be calculated by repeating subtraction as follows.
xy=a (>0)
ay=b (>0)
by=c (>0)
cy=d (<0)
In this way, as a result of repeating subtraction of the total number of games y, “>0 (greater than “0”)” is “3”, so the quotient of “x÷y” is “3”. It can be calculated to be present. Further, in the present embodiment, since the fractional part is rounded down, the advantageous section ratio is calculated as “3” in the above example.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing of the advantageous zone ratio.
First, in step S301, the data of the RWM 53 is acquired in the register. As in the above case, seven registers A, B, C, D, E, H and L are used.
In this step S301, each data of "F001" to "F007" shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the register. Specifically, it is as follows.
A register: Stores data of "F007" D register: Stores data of "F006" E register: Stores data of "F005" B register: Stores data of "F004" C register: Stores data of "F003" H register: Stores the data of "F002" L register: Stores the data of "F001"

Next, the process proceeds to step S302, and the advantageous zone ratio (RWM53) is initialized. This process clears (to "0") the data stored in "F008" in FIG.
Then, in step S303, the lower byte is subtracted. This processing subtracts the data stored in the DE register (the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games) from the data stored in the HL register (the lower 2 bytes of the advantageous interval game count corresponding value), and calculates the operation result. Store in HL register.

Next, in step S304, it is determined whether a carry has occurred. If the carry flag is not set (carry flag≠“1”) as a result of the calculation in step S303 (the result of subtracting the DE register value from the HL register value), it is determined as “No”.
If it is determined that the carry flag is raised (there is a carry-down), the process proceeds to step S305, and if it is determined that there is no carry-forward, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the upper 2 bytes of the advantageous zone game count corresponding value, that is, the BC register value is "0". When the value is "0", the subsequent subtraction cannot be performed, and the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S306.
In step S306, "1" is subtracted from the upper byte of the advantageous zone game count corresponding value. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the BC register value, and the calculation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, the upper byte is subtracted. Specifically, the A register value (the upper 1 byte of the total number of games) is subtracted from the BC register value (the upper 2 bytes of the advantageous period game count corresponding value), and the calculation result is stored in the BC register. Then, the process proceeds to step S308, and it is determined whether the calculation result in step S307 is less than "0", that is, whether the carry flag is set by the calculation in step S307. When the carry flag is set, it is determined to be "Yes" in step S308, and further subtraction cannot be performed, so that the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined "No" in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309.
In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (a part of the storage area of the RWM 53).

In the next step S310, the data (advantageous section ratio) stored in "F008" is stored in the HL register, and "1" is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to step S311, and the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303 to repeat the above process (subtraction).
Through the above processing, the total number of games is subtracted from the advantageous-zone game count corresponding value, and the advantageous-zone ratio is incremented by "1" for each subtraction. Therefore, after the processing of FIG. 37, the advantageous interval ratio calculated from the advantageous interval game number corresponding value stored in “F001” to “F007” and the total number of games is stored in “F008”.
As is apparent from the above, the advantageous section ratio is incremented by "1" each time the processing of steps S303 to S311 of Fig. 37 is performed once. That is, the number of executions (the number of repetitions) of steps S303 to S311 becomes the advantageous section ratio.

In the above, the quotient of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous zone games (the value obtained by multiplying the number of advantageous zone games by 100) and the total number of games is calculated as the advantageous zone ratio (%), but the same method as this calculation method is used. By (repetition of subtraction), the continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), character ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), continuous character ratio (cumulative), and character ratio (total) are calculated. be able to.

Specifically, the payout number corresponding value at the time of continuous winning action of 6000 games (15 sets) (“F070” to “F06E” in FIG. 29) and the total payout number of 6000 games (15 sets) (in FIG. 28) , "F031" to "F02F"), the same subtraction as above is repeated to calculate a quotient of "a value corresponding to the number of payout coins for continuous winning of 6000 games/total payout number of 6000 games". The value is stored in "F075" in FIG. 29 as the continuous winning action rate (6000 games).

In addition, from the cumulative value corresponding to the number of payout coins during continuous accessory operation (“F074” to “F071” in FIG. 29) and the total cumulative payout number (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), “ A quotient of "cumulative total number of paid-out products during continuous accessory operation/total accumulated number of paid-out products" is calculated, and that value is stored in "F076" in FIG. 29 as a continuous accessory operation ratio (total).

Similarly, from the value corresponding to the number of payouts during the bonus game operation of 6000 games (“F0B0” to “F0AE” in FIG. 30) and the total number of payouts of 6000 games (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28). , "The quotient of "the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the bonus game is operated for 6000 games/the total number of payouts for the bonus game for 6000 games" is stored, and the value is stored in "F0B5" in FIG. 30 as the bonus operation ratio (6000 games) ..

In addition, the cumulative total corresponding to the number of payout coins during operation of the accessory (“F0B4” to “F0B1” in FIG. 30) and the cumulative total number of payouts (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), 30 is calculated and the value is stored in "F0B6" in FIG. 30 as the accessory operation ratio (cumulative).

FIG. 38 shows the "advantageous section ratio", the "continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", the "character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", and the "continuous character parts" calculated as described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of "ratio (cumulative)" and "characteristics ratio (cumulative)." These five pieces of information are displayed by the information type and the numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74.
Note that the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are examples, and the information is not limited to these pieces of information, and information other than these may be displayed, or some of the information shown in FIG. 38 may be displayed. You may display only the information. The display order is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The management information is displayed as described above for the following reason.
As for amusement machines, those that meet the type test specified by the wind management law are allowed to install a hall. Here, during the type test, when the 6000 game is executed, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio do not exceed a predetermined value (70% for the character ratio and 60% for the continuous character ratio). There are established rules.
In addition, at the time of the type test, a document describing the average value of the role ratio of the gaming machine and the continuous role ratio of the applied game machine will be attached (in the future, the average value of the advantageous section ratio will also be stated May be required).

In this case, a clerk or a third person in the hall can easily confirm whether the gaming machine installed in the hall has the same specifications as the compatible gaming machine (whether it is not illegal). Is desired.
For example, a gaming machine with a numerical value that differs from the compatible gaming machine may differ from the compatible gaming machine. In this case, request the manufacturer to confirm the gaming machine. This makes it possible to confirm fraud and the like at an early stage.
Therefore, if a function for calculating and displaying management information is provided as in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily and surely confirm whether or not the management information matches the matched one.

In this embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (the door switch 15 is turned on), the setting key is inserted, and the setting key switch 12 is turned clockwise by 90 degrees, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. .. This state is the so-called setting confirmation. Therefore, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. It should be noted that the setting value is not changed during the setting confirmation because the setting value is different from that during the setting change.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once during this setting confirmation, the "advantageous section ratio" is displayed in the digits 6 to 9 in FIG. First, the digits 6 and 7 display the information type. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “U7”. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the advantageous section ratio is “50 (%)”, and the digits 7 and 8 are displayed as “50”. Therefore, “U750” is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).
The numerical value of the management information is displayed in decimal notation.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, "continuous winning role ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, and "y6" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "45". (%)” is displayed.
Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, the display of "feature ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, and the type of this information is displayed as "y7". In this example, the ratio is "60 (% )” is displayed.

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed and "A6" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "48 (%)". it's shown.
Further, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once again, the display of "characteristic ratio (cumulative)" is displayed, "A7" is displayed as the type of this information, and the ratio is "52(%)" in this example. it's shown.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display returns to the initial display and the advantageous section "U750" is displayed.
The display of the management information may be turned off when the setting switch 13 is not operated for a fixed time (for example, 10 seconds). After the light is turned off, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the advantageous section ratio “U750” which is the first display is displayed.

Further, while the door switch 15 detects the opening of the front door, the management information is continuously displayed (the digits 6 to 9 are continuously lit), and the door switch 15 detects that the front door is closed. At this time, the digits 6 to 9 may be turned off.
In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section “U750” may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on, or the door switch 15 If the opening of the front door is detected by, the digits 6 to 9 are not turned on, and when the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on, the advantageous section “U750” may be displayed.

Further, irrespective of whether or not the opening of the front door by the door switch 15 is detected, after the power switch 11 is turned on, a predetermined period (for example, about every 3 seconds (the number of interrupt processing is 1500 interrupts). )), the display contents shown in FIG. 38 may be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74.
Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information in which the ratio depends on the set value such as the continuous winning role ratio.
On the other hand, there is a high possibility that the front door will be opened while the hall is open (when the player can play).
a) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty,
b) An error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the medal selector,
c) An error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the payout opening of the hopper 35,
d) An error that occurs when the hopper 35 is full of medals (the sub-housing provided next to the hopper 35 and storing the medals overflowing from the hopper 35 is full) Error belonging to error) and the like.

When a person related to the hall opens the front door when such an error occurs, the player may see the management information and guess the set value. In order to solve such a problem, when all of the errors from a) to d) or at least one of the errors from a) to d) occurs, the management information display LED 74 does not perform the lighting display. It is desirable to configure so as to turn off (turn off). The error is not limited to the above-mentioned errors a) to d), and the management information display LED 74 may not be lit even when another error occurs.
In addition, when the above-mentioned non-recoverable error occurs, the credibility of the management information to be displayed is doubtful. Therefore, it is desirable not to display.

The front door must be opened in order to see the management information displayed on the main control board 50. If the front door is opened, a door open error will occur. You can display the information.

Further, the above information types “U7”, “y6”, “y7”, “A6”, and “A7” are examples, and any display is made by using two-digit alphabets, symbols, numerical values, or a combination thereof. be able to.
Further, in the above example, different numerical examples are shown for the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio, but when only the continuous accessory is provided as in the present embodiment, the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio are the same value. Becomes

Further, in the case of performing the above display, for example, when the door switch 15 is turned on, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and the setting switch 13 is turned on, the mode shifts to the management information display mode and "U7 (advantageous section) The segment data indicating "proportion)" is read and displayed in digits 6 and 7. Specifically, if “U7” is displayed, the segment data will be “00111110(B)” and “00100111(B)”.

Further, when displaying a numerical value, for example, if it is an advantageous section ratio, the data of “F008” in FIG. 27 described above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is “50(D)”, the data stored in “F008” is “00110010”. When that value is converted into segment data, it becomes “01101101(B)” and “00111111(B)”.

Further, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) is read, and it is determined whether the total number of games has reached “175000 (D)”. When it is determined that the total number of games has not reached "175000" games, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed in blinking. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games has reached “175000” games, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is lit and displayed. In this way, the display pattern is changed depending on whether or not the total number of games has reached “175,000 games”.

As a specific example of blinking display, for example, display is performed in a pattern of repeating turning off and turning on at intervals of "0.5 seconds", and turning off time is "0.5 seconds" and lighting time is "1 second" is repeated. An example is displaying in a pattern. Compared to the case where the turn-off time and the turn-on time are set to the same time, it is possible to make the display time of the management information longer by making the turn-on time longer than the turn-off time, and the illumination of the hall or the like is dim. The visibility can be improved even under the circumstances.
The display pattern may be different so that it is possible to determine whether or not the "175000" game has been reached. Therefore, it is not limited to blinking or lighting, and for example, the display of the information type "U7" is changed to "U7"(" Display different from "175000" game or more), for example, "U1" (less than "175000" game) may be displayed. Alternatively, when the game is less than "175000", "U7" may be displayed in blinking and the numerical value may be displayed in a lighted state.

Similar to the above, when displaying the continuous character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games), if the total number of games does not reach "6000" games, the continuous character ratio and The numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games reaches "6000" games, the numerical values of the continuous character ratio and the character ratio are lighted and displayed, respectively.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous winning character ratio (6000 games) and the winning character ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) in FIG. It is read, it is determined whether or not the game has reached "6000", and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

Similarly, in the case of displaying the continuous character ratio (cumulative) and the character ratio (total), when the total number of games does not reach the “175000” game, the continuous character ratio (total) and The numerical value of the accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games reaches "175000" games, the numerical values of the continuous character ratio (cumulative) and the character ratio (total) are lit up and displayed, respectively.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous character ratio (total) and character ratio (total), the value of the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) is read in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has reached, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

In particular, regarding the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio, whether it is 6000 games or more and whether it is 175000 games or more are displayed in a distinguishable manner (by different display modes, etc.). , Has the following advantages.
For example, when deciding whether or not it is an illegal gaming machine based on the currently displayed advantageous section ratio, continuous character ratio, and character ratio management information, how many times the management information indicates It is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the game machine is an illegal game machine by referring to whether the value is for.

For example, assume that the design value (average value) of the advantageous section ratio is 55 (%) at the time of application for the type of gaming machine.
At this time, for example, when the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games is 80 (%) and when the advantageous section ratio is 175,000 games or more and the advantageous section ratio is 80 (%), the determination as to whether or not it is illegal is different. .. There is a good possibility that the value of the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games has not yet converged. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio in the 175,000 games is a value for a sufficient number of games, and it is considered that the value has converged. Therefore, the latter can be judged to have a higher possibility of fraud.

In this way, even if the numbers are the same, as the number of games increases, the numerical value converges on the design value. Therefore, if the number of times of playing and the numerical value are combined to determine whether the game machine is an illegal game machine, More accurate judgment can be made.
As described above, when the total number of games does not reach the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175,000 games), it is displayed as blinking, and when it reaches the predetermined number of games, it is displayed as lighted. On the contrary, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games, it may be displayed as a light, and when it has reached the predetermined number of games, it may be displayed as a blink.

Further, in the above example, the digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 and the management information display LED 74 is provided. However, for example, the management information may be displayed using the storage number display LED 76 or the acquisition number display LED 78. It is possible. With this setting, it is not necessary to separately provide the digits 6 to 9, so that the cost can be reduced.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information by using the storage number display LED 76.
In the example of FIG. 39, an example having nine medals as credits is shown. Therefore, initially, the display of the storage number display LED 76 is "09".
Even if the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, the display of the stored number display LED 76 does not change (because a door open error is displayed by the acquired number display LED 78 described later).

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the stored number display LED 76 displays "U7" indicating the advantageous section ratio. Then, when a fixed time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50”, which is the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left as it is, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds and repeated.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed next time, the stored number display LED 76 displays "y6" indicating "the continuous winning role ratio (6000 games)". Then, when the above-mentioned certain time has elapsed, the numerical value "45" of the "continuous accessory ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, as in the above case, if this state is left as it is, “y6” and “45” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds, and this is repeated.
In the example of FIG. 39, the arrow is shown to shift from the display of “50” to the display of “y6”, but even if the setting switch 13 is pressed during the display of “U7”, the display of “y6” is displayed. Of course, this is true (same for other figures).

Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y6" or "45" is displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays "y7" indicating that "role ratio (6000 games)", When the above-mentioned certain time has elapsed, the numerical value "60" of the "role ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, in the same manner as above, if this state is left as it is, “y7” and “60” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds and repeated.

Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while "y7" or "60" is being displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays "A6", which indicates "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)". The numerical value "48" of the "continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed. Then, in the same manner as above, if this state is left as it is, “A6” and “48” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds and repeated.
Further, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed during the display of "A6" or "48", "A7" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76, which indicates "the character ratio (cumulative)". The numerical value "52" of the "characteristics ratio (cumulative)" is displayed when the certain time has elapsed. Then, in the same manner as above, if this state is left as it is, “A7” and “52” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds and repeated.

Further, when the setting switch 13 is further pressed in this state, the display returns to the display of the first advantageous section ratios "U7" and "50".
When the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off while the above display is being performed, the storage number is switched to the display "09".

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the acquired number display LED 78.
In the example of FIG. 40, an example in which “09” is displayed as the acquisition number is shown.
Then, when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. As a result, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "dE" indicating a door open error. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "U7" indicating the advantageous section ratio. Then, when a fixed time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, "50", which is the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left as it is, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every 2 seconds and repeated.

Thereafter, similar to the example of FIG. 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, predetermined management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, when the front door is closed and the door switch 15 is turned off, the error content "dE" is displayed again (the door open error cannot be solved by simply closing the front door). Then, in order to eliminate this error display, an error canceling operation is performed. For example, the error is released by inserting a door key into a keyhole provided in the front door and turning the door key counterclockwise, for example. When the error releasing operation is performed in this manner, the acquired number display LED 78 again displays the acquired number "09" before "dE" is displayed.

In the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the continuous character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games) are less than the total number of games “6000”, at least one of the information type and the numerical value blinks. indicate. Similarly, when the continuous character ratio (total) and character ratio (total) are less than the total number of games played, “175000”, at least one of the information type and the numerical value is displayed in blinking.

<Second Embodiment>
Then, 2nd Embodiment of this invention is described.
In the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (or the main control board 50B when divided into the main control boards 50A and 50B) is constantly operated. , Is lit up.
There are various ways of displaying the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 when the light is constantly turned on. For example, the management information to be displayed may be updated every 5 seconds. Specifically, “U750” (display for 5 seconds)→“y645” (display for 5 seconds)→... “A752” (display for 5 seconds)→“U750” (display for 5 seconds)→... It can be mentioned. In addition, a digit extinguishing time of about 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view showing the base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. 41, the illustration of the front door is omitted. Note that the front door opens/closes the front surface of the base portion 1 with the “front door opening/closing shaft” (left side in the drawing) in FIG. 41 as a support shaft. 41 is used in the description of the second embodiment, the structure of the first embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 41.
As shown in FIG. 41, a power supply unit including a power switch 11, a medal payout device including a hopper 35, a symbol display device including three reels 31, and the like are housed inside the base portion 1.
The sub control board 80 is attached to the left side surface on the inner surface side of the base portion 1. On the other hand, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 housed in the board case 16 are attached to the back surface inside the inner surface of the base portion 1. Furthermore, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 are mounted above the symbol display device so that the state of the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 can be easily visually confirmed when the front door is opened. For this reason, it is attached in a relatively easy-to-see position in the base portion 1.
For this reason, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can also be visually confirmed relatively easily.

According to the specifications of the slot machine 10, in addition to the method of automatically supplying medals to the hopper 35a when there are no more medals in the hopper 35, the clerk in the hall opens the front door each time there are no more medals in the hopper 35. Then, a method of supplying medals to the hopper 35 is known.
However, when the front door is opened, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 always displays the management information, so that the player can see the management information. .. As a result, it is possible to know the ratio of the advantageous section, the ratio of continuous winnings, etc. of the table in which the player is currently playing. Therefore, there is a possibility that the set value can be estimated based on these values.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 always displays the management information, but does not allow the player to easily see it.

42 is a diagram showing the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 (50A and 50B) in the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 3 of the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, the example 1 of (a) shows an example in which the main control board 50 is composed of one, and the example 2 of (b) is composed of two main control boards 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this point is the same as FIG. 3 of the first embodiment).
42A, the management information display LED 74 is different from that of the first embodiment in that it is arranged as close to the left side as possible when viewed from the front of the main control board 50. In FIG. 41, the opening/closing axis of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front in the figure. Therefore, by arranging the management information display LED 74 as far to the left as possible when viewed from the front, even if the front door is opened. , It becomes difficult for the player to see.

Further, in the example of FIG. 3B, the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B is opposite to that of FIG. 3B. The management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B, but is located on the left side in the board case 16.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the interval (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the caulking portion 16a is made longer. When the position of the management information display LED 74 is leftward in FIG. 42, when the caulking portion 16a of the substrate case 16 is moved away from the management information display LED 74, as shown in FIG. 42 (also in FIG. 3), the caulking portion 16a is shown. Is the right end of the substrate case 16.
By doing so, even when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed and the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is accessed, the management information display LED 74 is damaged or damaged when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed. Can be prevented more effectively.

Further, the caulking portion 16a is for breaking when the substrate case 16 is opened, but in addition to the caulking portion 16a, a main body caulking portion (not shown) for fixing the gaming machine and the substrate case 16 is provided. You may have it. At this time, when the board case 16 is removed from the gaming machine, it is also necessary to break the caulking portion of the main body. Also in this case, like the caulking portion 16a, in order to prevent accidental damage or damage to the management information display LED 74 when the caulking portion of the main body is destroyed, the position where the main portion caulking portion is provided is the first position. If it is a position (for example, the upper end portion of the board case 16), the position where the management information display LED 74 is provided is a second position (for example, the central portion of the main control board 50 is the lower portion, the right portion, which is away from the first position). It is desirable to provide it on the side or left side).

As described above, by disposing the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the caulking portion 16a and/or the main body caulking portion are provided, damage or the like of the management information display LED 74 can be effectively prevented. it can.
Although the position of the caulking portion 16a is the right end portion, the position is not limited to this, and the caulking portion 16a may be designed as the upper end portion, for example. At this time, the management information display LED 74 is a lower part, a right part, or a left part with respect to the central part of the main control board 50, so that the management information display LED 74 is accidentally damaged when the caulking part 16a is destroyed. It can be prevented from being damaged.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 times, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set using a variable other than the total number of games, such as 100 games. Alternatively, it is also possible to set a plurality of conditions such as 1500 games or 3000 cards and to judge that the upper limit is reached when either one of them is satisfied.

(2) The advantageous zone display LED 77 uses the segment DP of the stored number display LED 76, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated indicator (LED or the like) for displaying whether or not it is the advantageous zone may be provided. However, if the existing LEDs can be used as in the above embodiment, the cost can be reduced.
Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. Therefore, the lamp that displays the advantageous section needs to be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the effect lamp 21 that is electrically connected to the sub control board 80 displays the advantageous section. It cannot be a lamp.
However, even if it is a lamp that looks like a kind of effect lamp, if it is a lamp controlled by the main control board 50, it can be used as a lamp for displaying an advantageous section.

Further, although the advantageous section display LED 77 is composed of the digit 2 segment DP of the stored number display LED 76, it may be composed of the digit 4 segment DP of the acquired number display LED 78, for example.

Furthermore, when the player finishes the game, the menu button 25 may be operated in order to display the game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, by arranging the advantageous section display LED in the vicinity of the menu button 25, it is possible to make the player notice that the advantageous section is in effect at the end of the game. For example, even if the storage number display LED 76 (the segment DP of the digit 2 is the advantageous section display LED 77) or the acquisition number display LED 78 (the segment DP of the digit 4 is the advantageous section display LED 77) is arranged near the menu button 25. Good. Of course, as shown in FIG. 2, it is also effective to provide the advantageous section display LED 77 near the settlement switch 46. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous zone, the advantageous button display LED 77 is turned on before the menu button 25 becomes operable, so that the player does not notice the shift to the advantageous zone. It is possible to prevent operating (displaying a game history (two-dimensional code)).

(3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, when the power switch 11 is turned on again, the advantageous zone control means 69 turns the power on/off. In order to maintain the advantageous zone before and after, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on again. Therefore, for example, when closing the store in a state where the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, and when it is desired to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77 at the start of business on the next day, the setting is changed (including resetting the same set value). It can be mentioned. By changing the setting, the predetermined area of the RWM 53 is initialized, and the display data (data of the advantageous section) of the storage number display LED 76 is also initialized. Therefore, the 8th bit in the segment data of the digit 2 is also "0". It will be.

(4) During the advantageous zone, in the game in which the condition device capable of operating the instruction function is won, the instruction function is activated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not always necessary to activate the instruction function even in a game in which a condition device capable of operating the instruction function is won in the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous zone, whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game, the number of times of the instruction function operation game is determined by lottery, etc., and the instruction function operation game is executed for the determined number of times. Good. Then, even if the number of games is over, if the continuation condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is possible to continue to stay in the advantageous section and again determine the number of games to execute the instruction function operation game by lottery etc. Is. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, the lottery that falls from the advantageous section to the normal section is based on winning each game or a specific condition device (for example, common wins such as small win D and small win E1 alone win). The decision is made.

(5) In this embodiment, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous zone games is stored as a value obtained by multiplying the number of games by 100. Similarly, the value corresponding to the number of paid-out coins at the time of continuous accessory operation and the value corresponding to the number of paid-out coins at operation of a winning accessory are each stored as a value obtained by multiplying the payout number by 100. However, not limited to this, it is possible to store the number of games itself and the number of payouts itself without multiplying by 100, depending on the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, the method of calculating the character ratio (CPU used). And is not necessarily limited to storing a value multiplied by 100.
Similarly, the value of the total number of games is stored as the number of games itself, but is not limited to this. Depending on the convenience of calculation, a value obtained by adding a predetermined number to the total number of games or a value multiplied by a predetermined value (total game) A value corresponding to the number of times) may be stored.
In this case, when the advantageous zone ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are calculated, the data in the storage area in which the number of games itself and the number of payouts themselves are stored is multiplied by 100, and the subtraction process described above is repeatedly executed. The calculation can be performed by executing the processing (for example, FIG. 37).

(6) The advantageous zone ratio, continuous role operating ratio, and role operating ratio are calculated for each game or for each predetermined number of games regardless of whether management information is displayed, and are stored in predetermined areas of the RWM 53. You can leave it. On the other hand, the advantageous zone ratio, the continuous role work ratio, and the role work ratio are calculated when the management information is displayed (when a display request is made), and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 and the calculation is performed. You may display the result.

(7) In the above embodiment, each time the setting switch 13 is pressed, the management information is displayed in order. However, the switch is not limited to the setting switch 13, and may be another switch such as the bet switch 40 or the like, or a switch dedicated to displaying the management information may be separately provided.
Further, although the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately in the present embodiment, it is conceivable that the setting switch and the reset switch are configured by one switch as the setting change/reset switch. In this case, if the operation of the setting change/reset switch does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation, the management information can be displayed by the operation of the setting change/reset switch. The same applies when the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided as in the present embodiment and the management information is displayed by operating the reset switch 14.

Specifically, when an error is detected, the mode is not changed to the management information display mode, and the mode is changed to the management information display mode on condition that no error has occurred.
For example, of the recoverable errors, when a medal retention error occurs in the medal selector, the management information display mode is not entered unless the error is removed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the management information is displayed each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. That is, even if the operator releases his/her hand from the operation switch 13 after turning on the setting switch 13, the management information remains displayed. On the other hand, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is pressed, and the display of the management information may be terminated when the operator releases the setting switch 13. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is first pressed, the first management information "U750" is displayed, but when the setting switch 13 is released, the display is terminated (digits 6 to 6). 9 is turned off). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the second management information "y645" is displayed. However, when the setting switch 13 is released, it is possible to control the display to end. Even when the switch for displaying the management information is a switch other than the setting switch 13, the same control as above can be performed.

As described above, there are various variations in which switch is used to display the management information, and how the relationship between the operation of the switch displaying the management information and the display pattern (display time) is set. However, the present invention is not limited to those shown in this embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, the display pattern of the management information is as follows.
a) Display pattern for constantly displaying the management information b) Pattern for displaying the management information when the front door is opened (when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) Opening the front door and a predetermined switch A pattern for displaying management information when operating d) A pattern for displaying the management information when the front door is opened, the setting key is inserted and the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and a predetermined switch is operated is given. To be
However, when the operation of shifting to the setting change mode is performed and the shift to the setting change mode is performed, the management information display mode is not shifted and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, the digit 5 is turned on, but the digits 6 to 9 are turned off.

(8) In the present embodiment, the total number of games is counted until the count value of the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full (“FFFFFF(H)”). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the cumulative total reaches a predetermined value, the count may be ended even if the upper limit of the storage capacity is not reached.
Further, when the total number of games reaches a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games may be cleared and the counting of the total number of games may be started again.
The same applies to the total payout number.

(9) The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed so that the advantageous section ratio is “70” (%) or less. For this reason, it is not assumed that the advantageous section ratio will exceed "70" (%) in the market. However, it is undeniable that the advantageous section ratio may exceed “70” (%), for example, when a goto act is performed. Therefore, for example, the data value of “F008” that stores the advantageous zone ratio is monitored, and if the value exceeds “70 (D)”, some warning is output or the advantageous zone rate is displayed. An example is to make it different from the normal time (display that it is abnormal). For example, in the display of the information type “U7” of the advantageous section ratio, the method of blinking the high-order digit “U” and the low-order digit “7” alternately at high speed can be cited.

Similarly, when the design value upper limit of the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio is set to, for example, "60 (%)", when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the design upper limit, Examples include a method of outputting a warning and displaying the information type display in the same manner as above.
Alternatively, the external signal transmitting means 70 may be used to transmit information about the advantageous zone ratio to the hall computer 200, and, for example, when the advantageous zone ratio exceeds “70” (%), information regarding a warning may be transmitted. Can be mentioned.

(10) As described above, if the advantageous section ratio is set to be “70” (%) or less with respect to the entire game section, the other can be set relatively freely.
In addition, the winning of the normal section to the advantageous section may be set to be less than “1/32”.
Furthermore, as described above, during the advantageous section, the instruction function may be activated at all times when the condition device capable of operating the instruction function is elected, but the instruction function is not activated only by shifting to the advantageous section and the instruction is given. The instruction function may be activated when a lottery on whether or not to activate the function is won. Alternatively, when shifting to the advantageous section, whether it is an advantageous section in which the instruction function is always activated, or whether it is the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated only when a lottery whether or not to activate the instruction function is won Alternatively, it may be decided by lottery or the like.

Furthermore, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (end of the advantageous section) may be performed when the predetermined number of games is exhausted at the transition to the advantageous section, or without determining the number of games. Alternatively, a shift (fall) lottery from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed every game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the lottery is won, the advantageous section may be shifted to the normal section. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, it is unconditionally controlled to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section.

(11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but may be composed of, for example, two digits. Then, as shown in the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the information type “U7” is displayed, the numerical value “50” is displayed after the elapse of the predetermined time, and then the predetermined time is elapsed. Alternatively, “U7” and “50” may be alternately and repeatedly displayed every time.

(12) The advantageous zone ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are not necessarily displayed as accurate values because they are calculated by rounding down after the decimal point. In that sense, the advantageous zone ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio correspond to the value corresponding to (corresponding to) the advantageous section ratio, the value corresponding to (corresponding to) the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio (corresponding to, respectively). ).
In addition, the advantageous zone ratio, continuous character ratio, and character ratio are not limited to figures rounded down after the decimal point, but figures rounded down after the decimal point, figures rounded up after the decimal point, and the last digit is "5" or " It may be a numerical value or the like converted into 10" increments.

(13) In the present embodiment, at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 and when winning the small winning combination E2, the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line is the same. For example, when the small win E1 or E2 is won, the middle roll cherry can be stopped when the left or middle first stop is made (small win 36 wins), and the middle cherry does not appear at the right first stop. (Small winning combination 38). Therefore, it was not possible to determine whether the small win E1 or E2 was won, regardless of whether or not the middle-tier cherry appeared.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the middle tier cherry does not appear, instead, the stop result may be changed.
For example, when the small win E1 or E2 is won, the middle tier cherry appears when the left or middle first stop is made, and when the middle tier cherry appears, the player determines which of the small wins E1 or E2 is won. Do not allow

On the other hand, when the small win E1 or E2 is elected and the right first stop is performed, the middle tier cherry is controlled not to appear in the same manner as above, and instead of the middle tier cherry not appearing, the small win E1 or E2 An example of this is to make a stop result that allows the player to determine which one has been won.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to control as follows.
First, the small winning combinations included in the winning of the small winning combination E1 are the small winning combinations 36 and 38, as in the above embodiment.
On the other hand, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E2 are the small wins 36 and 41 (the small win 41 is newly added).
Then, the small win 36 (middle-tier cherry) can be stopped at the time of the left or middle first stop when the small win E1 or E2 is won, and the small win 38 is stopped at the right first stop when the small win E1 is won. On the other hand, the small win 41 is stopped at the first stop on the right when the small win E2 is won.

The combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 41 is, for example, "bell A/bell B"-"replay"-"black 7/blue 7/red 7/blank". As a result, the symbols on the middle reel 31 are different when the small winning combination 38 is stopped and when the small winning combination 41 is stopped. When the small winning combination 38 is stopped, "replay" does not stop on the middle reel 31, but when the small winning combination 41 is stopped, "replay" is always stopped on the middle reel 31. As a result, the winning of the small winning combination 38 (small winning combination E1) or the small winning combination 41 (small winning combination E2) can be determined.

Further, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small win 38 is stopped when the middle cherry is not stopped when the small win E1 is won, and the small win 41 is stopped when the middle cherry is not stopped when the small win E2 is won. May be. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the small winning combination E1 or the small winning combination E2 is won when the middle-tier cherry is not stopped even when the left or middle first stopping is performed.

Besides, for example, the following method may be mentioned.
The small wins included in the winning of the small win E1 are the small wins 36 and 38, as in the above embodiment. The small wins included in the winning of the small win E2 are the small wins 36 and the small wins 37 and 38 as in the above embodiment. At the time of the left or middle first stop at the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, the small role 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped. The small win 38 is stopped by the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at the first stop on the right when the small win E2 is won.
Then, when the small winning combination 38 is missed when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the combination of different symbols is stopped. Thereby, the small winning combination E1 or E2 may be determined.

(14) When winning the 1BBA+small winning combination E1 and turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 by the time when the predetermined timing of the next game arrives, the effect (continuous effect etc.) as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is not output. It is preferable. This is because the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and it is known that the player has shifted to the advantageous zone. However, it is possible to output the continuous production of whether or not the player has won the 1BBA (special role). Further, when it is determined that 1BBA+small winning combination E1 is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not always lit even after a predetermined timing has elapsed (always The timing 2) indicated by 23 is that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the small role E1 has won, so that the small role E1 is independently won and the advantageous section is entered. Since it can be seen that it has been decided to move, in such a case, it is not necessary to output an effect or the like that fuels whether or not 1BB is won.

(15) In the present embodiment, one winning combination can be won at the time of incorrect answer of the pushing order when the small winning combination B group is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any number of small wins that can be won when the wrong press order is obtained when the small win group B is won. Further, although the dropout rate at the time of an incorrect answer to the pushing order at the time of winning the small winning group B is set to 75% in the present embodiment, the dropout rate is not limited to this, and various settings such as 50% can be set.
Further, even when the small order C group wins and the pressing order is incorrect, the winning combination can be set to drop with a certain probability as in the case of winning the small role B group.

(16) In the above embodiment, during 1BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) of setting 6 is set to be larger than that of setting 1, and it is advantageous when the number of games during 1BBA operation reaches a predetermined number, for example. I added the section.
However, contrary to the above, during 1BBA operation, by increasing the winning probability of the small winning combination A of the setting 6 with respect to the setting 1, and decreasing the winning probability of the small winning combination E2, the setting 6 has less games. The number of times (expected value) may be set. In this case, for example, when the operation of 1BBA is completed with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), the advantageous section is added.

(17) In the present embodiment, when a condition device that does not include a special role that can carry over a win, for example, when a small win E1 is independently won, and it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, it is advantageous by a predetermined timing. The section display LED 77 is turned on. Here, the "predetermined timing" is not limited to the timing shown in the above embodiment, but can be set variously. For example, in the game at the time of winning the small role E1, the winning determination is completed, the payout of medals is completed when the game is paid out, and the like.

Further, although not occurring in this embodiment, for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section in a game in which a replay is won, when the automatic bet is finished based on the winning of the replay, or the next game (replay) is started. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on when the switch 41 is operated.

(18) When "1BBA+small win E1" is won, the small win 36 can be won by operating the stop switch 42 with the left or middle first stop, so that the middle-tier cherry can appear. However, when the winning flag is only the small role E1, the middle tier cherry can appear, and when the winning flag of 1BBA is also set, the middle tier cherry does not appear in any pressing order (all win the small win 38). You may perform stop control like this.
When controlled in this way, there is a demerit in that it is not possible to display the middle tier cherry and to entice the player even when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of winning the "1BBA+small win E1".

On the other hand, even when the small winning combination E1 is independently won after the inside of 1BBA, the standing winning flag is "1BBA+small winning combination E1", so that the same stop control as described above can be adopted.
As described above, since it is not possible to determine the shift to the advantageous zone inside, even if the player wins the small role E1 and the middle tier cherry appears after the player knows that it is inside, the player will not I get the impression that I wasted money. On the other hand, if the stop control is performed as described above, the middle tier cherries do not appear at all in the interior, so that it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that he/she wasted money.

In particular, as a combination of the symbols of the small winning combination 38, there are "bell A/bell B"-"cherry"-"black 7/blue 7/red 7/blank" (FIG. 11). The pattern 02, "bell A/bell B"-"cherry"-"bell A/bell B", is similar. Therefore, by causing the combination of the above-mentioned symbols of the small winning combination 38 to appear, it is possible to show the small winning combination B group winning (invisible to the rare winning combination).
The above is the same when "1BBA + Small Win E2" is elected, when the inside of 1BBB is reached, when the small win E1 is independently won, and when the inside of 1BBB is reached and when the small win E2 is independently won. Is.

(19) As shown in FIG. 17, the non-RT and the RT1 have the same replay winning probability (the registered number is “8978”). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of the RT1 replay may be set higher than the winning probability of the non-RT replay.

(20) In the present embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1, the replay E is drawn at RT1, and the advantageous section is added by winning the replay E. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when transitioning to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to set the advantageous section as an additional specialized zone (a state where the frequency of the addition is high, a state where the number of additional games is increased). Then, the pattern design is displayed, and the additional specialization zone is continued until it shifts to RT2, and every time a predetermined condition is satisfied in this RT1 (not limited to winning of Replay E), the addition of the advantageous section is executed. Good.

(21) In the present embodiment, the RT after the operation of 1BBA is non-RT and the RT after the operation of 1BBB is RT1. However, instead of shifting to a different RT in this way, it may be shifted to the same RT. For example, the operation may be switched to non-RT after the end of 1BBB operation. In this case, after the operation of 1BBB in the advantageous zone ends, the advantageous zone may be added and set in the specialized zone.

(22) In the present embodiment, as the management information, the advantageous section ratio (total), continuous character ratio (6000 games and total), and character ratio (6000 games and total) are displayed, but other than these. It is also possible to calculate and display the management information, for example, the payout rate.
The following method can be given as a method for calculating the payout rate.
a) "Total number of payouts x 100" ÷ "Total number of games excluding replay after winning replay"
b) "(total number of payouts + number of replay prizes x 3) x 100" / "total number of games"
Then, when adopting a), each buffer for storing “total payout number×100” and “total number of games excluding replay after replay winning” is provided. When b) is adopted, a buffer for storing “(total payout number+replay winning number×3)×100” is provided. It is also possible to separately provide a buffer for “total payout number×100” and a “replay winning count×300” and add the numerical values of both.

In addition, "3" of "the number of replay winnings x 3" means the number of bets of the game when the replay is won. For example, in the case where the number of bets fluctuates depending on the game state or the like, it is not limited to “3”, and the value bet on the game when the replay is won (for example, “2” or “1”). There may be a game to play.
In addition, a storage area for storing the total number of games itself, the total number of payouts itself, and the number of replay winnings itself (“the number of replay winnings x the value bet on the game when the replay wins”) is provided, and the payout rate is set. When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 before calculation.

Further, as the calculation method of a) and b), a method of repeating subtraction is adopted as in the above-described calculation method.
Then, by displaying the payout rate as one of the management information and comparing it with the designed payout rate, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is an illegal game machine. Further, also in this case, if the lighting mode is changed depending on whether the total number of games is 6000 games or more or whether it is 175000 games or more, it is more accurate whether the gaming machine is illegal. It becomes possible to judge whether or not.
The display of the information type indicating the payout rate may be any display as long as it can be distinguished from other management information. For example, the digit 6 is displayed as “P.” and the digits 7 to 9 are displayed. Displaying the payout rate (three-digit numerical value) by using.

(23) In the present embodiment, the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter and may be an increment counter. Here, when the increment counter is adopted as the upper limit counter 69b, the following merits are obtained.
When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b reaches the upper limit value, for example, when the count value is “1500” in the case of an increment counter, the advantageous section is forcibly ended, and therefore various parameters related to the advantageous section (stored in the RWM 53) Value) is initialized. The parameters to be initialized include, for example, the advantageous section counter 69a, the upper limit counter 69b, the number of times of playing the instruction function operation game (when the instruction function is activated when the small winning combination B group is won), and the like. And, "0" is the optimum value at the time of initialization. Furthermore, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 that store the parameters to be initialized be consecutive. Specifically, for example, “F100”, “F101”, “F102”,...

This is similar to the initialization process of the RWM 53 due to the setting change, and the process of putting “0” in the address of the RWM 53 within the predetermined range can be initialized by repeating the process by shifting the address one by one. This is because it can be executed by the converted processing. It should be noted that the parameter that is cleared when the advantageous section becomes the upper limit value is initialized even when the setting is changed.
The address of the RWM 53 that stores the parameter to be initialized is regularly allocated (for example, “F100”, “F102”, “F104”,...) And the address is set to “0”. Even when the process of inserting is initialized by repeatedly performing the process while shifting the address by a predetermined value (“2” in the above case), the process can be simplified.

Here, in the case where the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter, when the count value is "0", it is "0" due to initialization, or the advantageous interval is the upper limit value (1500 games). ) And is "0", it is not known from the count value. Therefore, when determining whether or not it is the upper limit of the advantageous section based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and data indicating whether or not it is the advantageous section (in the predetermined area of the RWM 53, Memorized) and based on.
On the other hand, when the upper limit counter 69b is an increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is read, and if it is "1500", it can be determined that it is the upper limit of the advantageous section. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not it is the upper limit only by the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) The update of the data of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, and the processes of FIGS. 32, 36, and 37 are executed at the end of each game, more specifically, after the winning determination process. ..
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the management information such as the advantageous section ratio is continuously displayed, so that the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) may be displayed multiple times during one game. ..
Then, the advantageous section ratio and the like may be calculated each time when displayed.
As described above, the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) may be calculated a plurality of times during one game.
(25) The above-described embodiment and various modified examples are not limited to being implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Appendix>
The inventions (original inventions) described in the initial description of the present application can include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 21, and solve the problems to be solved by the respective initial inventions and the problems related to the initial inventions, respectively. Means for achieving the above and effects of the first invention are as follows. However, the invention described in the present specification does not mean that the inventions 1 to 21 are initially limited.

1. Original invention 1
(A) Initial Invention 1 Problem to be Solved The initial invention relates to a slot machine including an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional gaming machine, it is known that a cumulative value of the number of payouts is stored and a transition of the cumulative value of the payout number is displayed by a graph by a player's operation (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-125121). reference).
Although it is possible to confirm the cumulative value of the number of payouts in a conventional gaming machine, for example, in a slot machine that executes AT, it was not possible to know the ratio of AT to the entire game.
Moreover, it is not possible to judge whether the value is within the design value range or the like only by displaying the cumulative value of the number of payouts.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make it possible to easily and accurately confirm the stay rate in the advantageous section in a slot machine having the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of invention 1 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, it comprises an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the normal section, when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended,
First storage means (RWM53: “F007” to “F005” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games,
Second storage means (RWM53: “F004” to “F001” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section (a value obtained by multiplying the number of games by 100),
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37);
Means for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) when the condition for displaying the stay ratio in the advantageous section is satisfied.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games or a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed.
Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the design value range.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problem to be solved by Initial Invention 2 Same as Original Invention 1.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, it comprises an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the normal section, when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended,
First storage means (RWM53: “F007” to “F005” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games,
Second storage means (RWM53: “F004” to “F001” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section (a value obtained by multiplying the number of games by 100),
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37);
Means for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) when the condition for displaying the stay ratio of the advantageous section is satisfied,
When the value stored in the first storage means has not reached the predetermined value (“175000” game), the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is displayed in the specific display mode (for example, the mode in which the LED blinks). Then
When the value stored in the first storage means has reached a predetermined value, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is displayed in a display mode different from the specific display mode (for example, a mode in which an LED is turned on). It is characterized by

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games or a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed.
Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the design value range.
In addition, it is possible to easily determine how many times the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section corresponds to the number of games.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problem to be solved by Initial Invention 3 Same as Original Invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Original Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, it comprises an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the normal section, when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended,
First storage means (RWM53: “F007” to “F005” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games,
Second storage means (RWM53: “F004” to “F001” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section (a value obtained by multiplying the number of games by 100),
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37);
And means for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)),
The value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed based on that a predetermined switch (for example, the setting switch 13) is turned on, and the stay of the advantageous section is displayed based on that the predetermined switch is turned off. The feature is that the value corresponding to the ratio is not displayed.

The second solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, it comprises an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the normal section, when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended,
First storage means (RWM53: “F007” to “F005” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games,
Second storage means (RWM53: “F004” to “F001” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section (a value obtained by multiplying the number of games by 100),
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37);
And means for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)),
A value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed based on the operation of a predetermined switch (for example, the setting switch 13), and the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed based on the operation of the predetermined switch again. The feature is that the display of the value to be ended is ended.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 3 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games or a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed.
Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the design value range.
Further, it is possible to switch display/non-display of the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section by a simple operation of a predetermined switch.

4. Original invention 4
(A) Problem to be solved by Initial Invention 4 Same as Original Invention 1.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, it comprises an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the normal section, when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended,
First storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value obtained by adding "a value equivalent to "1" in decimal number" for each game as a value corresponding to the total number of games. )When,
Second storage means (RWM53: in FIG. 27, which can store a value obtained by adding "a value corresponding to "100" in decimal number" for each game in the advantageous section as a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section ("RWM53" in FIG. 27, ""F004" to "F001"),
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the value stored in the first storage means and the value stored in the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37);
Means for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)).

(C) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games or a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed.
Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the design value range.
Further, when calculating the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section, an integer value can be calculated.

5. Original invention 5
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 5 Same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 5 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, it comprises an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the normal section, when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended,
A first storage means (RWM53: FIG. 27) that has a storage area of 3 bytes and can store a value obtained by adding "a value corresponding to "1" in decimal number" for each game as a value corresponding to the total number of games. "F007" to "F005"),
A second memory having a 4-byte storage area and capable of storing a value obtained by adding "a value equivalent to "100" in decimal number" for each game in the advantageous section as a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section. Means (RWM53: "F004" to "F001" in FIG. 27),
A third having a storage area of 1 byte and capable of storing a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section calculated based on the value stored in the first storage means and the value stored in the second storage means. Storage means (RWM53: “F008” in FIG. 27),
Means for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)).
(C) Effect of Original Invention 5 Same as Original Invention 4.

6. Original invention 6
(A) Problem to be solved by Initial Invention 6 Same as Original Invention 1.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 6 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Storage means (RWM53),
Initialization means (power switch 11, reset switch 14) for initializing at least a part of the storage means on the basis of satisfying a predetermined condition,
In the normal section, when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended,
As the storage means,
First storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value obtained by adding "a value equivalent to "1" in decimal number" for each game as a value corresponding to the total number of games. )When,
Second storage means (RWM53: in FIG. 27, which can store a value obtained by adding "a value corresponding to "100" in decimal number" for each game in the advantageous section as a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section ("RWM53" in FIG. 27, "F004" to "F001"),
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the value stored in the first storage means and the value stored in the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37);
And means for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)),
The initialization means does not initialize the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games or a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed.
Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the design value range.
Further, even if the initialization operation is performed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section can be displayed based on the data accumulated so far.

7. Original invention 7
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 7 Same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Original Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, it comprises an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the normal section, when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended,
First storage means (RWM53: “F007” to “F005” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games,
Second storage means (RWM53: “F004” to “F001” in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section,
Means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means 69; FIG. 37);
And means for displaying a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)),
If the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage means is not exceeded even if "the value equivalent to "1" in decimal number" is added to the value stored in the first storage means for each game, 1 "the value equivalent to "1" in decimal number" is added to the value stored in the storage means,
When the value stored in the first storage means is the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the first storage means, the value stored in the first storage means is controlled to be the upper limit value as the game progresses. Then
When the value stored in the first storage means is the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the first storage means, the value stored in the second storage means is maintained even if the game progresses during the advantageous section. It is characterized by

(C) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games or a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed.
Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the design value range.
Further, when the value stored in the first storage means reaches the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the first storage means, the subsequent updating of the values of the first storage means and the second storage means ends, so both It is possible to eliminate the gap between the data of.

8. Original invention 8
(A) Problem to be solved by Initial Invention 8 Same as Original Invention 1.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, it comprises an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the normal section, when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended,
A first storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games, and a second storage means (RWM53 capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games of the advantageous section). 27: In FIG. 27, "F004" to "F001"), and means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means) 69; a main control board (main control board 50) including FIG. 37),
The main control board includes a plurality of visible display portions (digits 6 to 9),
When displaying the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section, the contents (information type) meaning the stay ratio in the advantageous section are displayed on some of the display units (digits 6 and 7), and the other part is displayed. The display unit (digits 8 and 9) displays a value (numerical value) corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 8 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games or a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed.
Further, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the design value range.
Further, for example, even when a value other than the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is displayed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section can be identified without being confused with other information. ..

9. Original invention 9
(A) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 9 Same as Original Invention 1.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 9 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, it comprises an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the normal section, when the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the transition is made to the advantageous section, and when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended,
A first storage means (RWM53: "F007" to "F005" in FIG. 27) capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games, and a second storage means (RWM53 capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games of the advantageous section). 27: In FIG. 27, "F004" to "F001"), and means for calculating a value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section based on the values stored in the first storage means and the second storage means (advantageous section control means) 69; a main control board (main control board 50) including FIG. 37),
The main control board includes a plurality of visible display portions (digits 6 to 9),
When the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section exceeds the specific value (70%), the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed on the display unit in a specific display mode (for example, blinking display), and the advantageous section is displayed. When the value corresponding to the stay ratio of does not exceed the specific value, the value corresponding to the stay ratio of the advantageous section is displayed on the display unit in a display mode different from the specific display mode (for example, lighting display). And

(C) Effect of Original Invention 9 According to the initial invention, a value corresponding to the total number of games or a value corresponding to the number of games in the advantageous section is stored, and a value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is calculated. Since it can be displayed, the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section can be easily and accurately confirmed.
Further, whether or not the value corresponding to the stay ratio in the advantageous section is within the design value range can be easily determined by the display mode.

10. Original invention 10
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 10 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game is executed in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, a correct answer push order when a push order bell is won) is operated. (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that the control (management) of the AT is performed not only by the sub control board but also by the main control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
However, the notification of the winning of the AT is exclusively executed by the sub control board, and even if the winning of the AT is determined by the main control board, the main control board does not notify the winning of the AT.
Further, even if the AT winning notification is given using a peripheral device electrically connected to the main control board, the AT winning notification is given after a predetermined game from the game won by the AT. There is a problem that a player may stop the game before the AT is notified of the winning.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to display the transition to the advantageous section by using the peripheral devices electrically connected to the main control board when the transition to the advantageous section is made, and the player Is to make the display easier to notice.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A storage number display means (storage number display LED 76) for displaying the storage number of the game medium,
And a settlement switch (46) that is operated when the stored game media are settled,
When the transition condition to the advantage section is satisfied, the transition to the advantage section is made, and when the termination condition of the advantage section is satisfied, the advantage section is ended,
The storage number display means has a plurality of segments (segments A to G and DP) that can be lighted, and displays the storage number by lighting some of the segments (segments A to G), and the other part. The segment (segment DP) lights up to indicate that it is an advantageous section,
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to display that it is the advantageous section by lighting the other part of the segments before the operation of the settlement switch becomes effective.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, it is possible to display that it is an advantageous section by using a part of the segments of the storage number display means.
Also, since it is displayed that it is an advantageous section until the operation of the settlement switch becomes effective, it is possible for the player to quit the game (operate the settlement switch) even though it is an advantageous section from the next game. Can be suppressed.

11. Original invention 11
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 11 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game is executed in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, a correct answer push order when a push order bell is won) is operated. (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that the control (management) of the AT is performed not only by the sub control board but also by the main control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Further, when the player wins the AT, for example, the number of predictive games is selected by lottery, and after winning the number of predictive games, the winning notification of the AT is given.
On the other hand, recently, it has been considered to shift to an advantageous section when a special role is won. Here, when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by the winning of the special role and the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by the winning of a role other than the special role. The problem is whether to execute with.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the first invention is to display the transition to the advantageous section at an appropriate timing when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with the winning of the winning combination as a trigger.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section,
A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
And a lottery means for executing a lottery so that the first win (1BBA win) or the second win (small win E1 single win)
The winning probability of the first win is the same for all settings,
The winning probability of the second win is the same for all settings,
In the case of the first winning, if the combination of the predetermined symbols corresponding to the first winning (the combination of the symbols of 1BBA) has not stopped, the winning relating to the predetermined combination of symbols is carried over to the next game,
When it becomes the second winning, do not carry over the second winning to the next game,
When the transition condition to the advantage section is satisfied, the transition to the advantage section is made, and when the termination condition of the advantage section is satisfied, the advantage section is ended,
In the normal section, when it becomes the first winning and the second winning, it is possible to decide to move to the advantageous section,
When it is decided that the second winning is achieved in the normal section and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display means is set by a predetermined timing (until the next game bet can be made and the settlement switch 46 can be operated). Is displayed by
When it is determined that the first winning is achieved in the normal section and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to not display the advantageous section display means (for example, to display when 1BBA is displayed) by the predetermined timing. It is characterized by

(C) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the initial invention, when a combination of predetermined symbols corresponding to the first winning is not stopped in the game which is the first winning, when the first winning is carried over to the next game. The next game can be executed without displaying the advantageous section display means.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display means from displaying before the player knows that the first winning has been won. In other words, it is possible to prevent only the display by the advantageous zone display means from being executed when the winning combination of the winning combination is not won.

12. Original invention 12
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 12 Same as the first invention 11.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section,
A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
And a lottery means for executing a lottery so that the first win (1BBA+small win E1 double win) or the second win (small win E1 single win)
The winning probability of the first win is the same for all settings,
The winning probability of the second win is the same for all settings,
The first winning is a winning including a special part (1BBA) that carries the winning to the next game until the combination of the symbols stops, and a predetermined part (small part E1) that does not carry the winning to the next game,
The second winning is a winning that includes a predetermined role and does not include a special role,
When the transition condition to the advantage section is satisfied, the transition to the advantage section is made, and when the termination condition of the advantage section is satisfied, the advantage section is ended,
In the normal section, when it becomes the first winning and the second winning, it is possible to decide to move to the advantageous section,
When it is determined that the first winning is achieved in the normal section and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display means is used until a predetermined timing (until the next game bet can be made and the settlement switch 46 can be operated). There is a case of displaying and a case of not displaying by the advantageous section display means by the predetermined timing,
When it is determined that the second winning is achieved in the normal section and it is decided to move to the advantageous section, the display by the advantageous section display means is performed by the predetermined timing.
The second solution is the first solution,
The first winning game is characterized by giving priority to stopping the combination of the symbols of the predetermined combination rather than stopping the combination of the symbols of the special combination.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, when it is determined that the first win is achieved and the advantageous zone is selected, the advantageous zone display means may or may not perform the display by a predetermined timing. Therefore, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined combination is stopped and the advantageous section display means displays, it is possible to expect the player to continue to win the special combination even after that. Become.

13. Original invention 13
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 13 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game is executed in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, a correct answer push order when a push order bell is won) is operated. (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that the control (management) of the AT is performed not only by the sub control board but also by the main control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Further, when the player wins the AT, for example, the number of predictive games is selected by lottery, and after winning the number of predictive games, the winning notification of the AT is given.
On the other hand, recently, for example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section by winning the winning combination of the role that does not carry over to the next game, it is considered to display the transition to the advantageous section before the start of the next game. ing.
However, such an early display has a problem that it is difficult to perform a stirrup production or the like as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to be able to output a curling effect or the like regarding the advantageous section after that even when the transition to the advantageous section is displayed at an early stage.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section,
A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
And a lottery means for executing a lottery so that a specific win (for example, a single win of the small role E1) may occur.
The winning probability of a specific win is the same for all settings,
When the transition condition to the advantage section is satisfied, the transition to the advantage section is made, and when the termination condition of the advantage section is satisfied, the advantage section is ended,
When it becomes a specific winning in the normal section, it is possible to decide to move to the advantageous section,
When it is determined that a specific winning is achieved in the normal section and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, display by the advantageous section display means until a predetermined timing (until the next game bet can be made and the settlement switch 46 can be operated). And then
In the advantageous section, at least one of the instruction function operation game (game that displays the correct answer pressing order when winning the small group B group) is executed,
The advantageous section has a first end condition (for example, the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is one) and a second end condition (for example, a game from the start of the advantageous section) in which the expected value of the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is different. The number of games is 100 games).

The second solution is the first solution,
As the end condition of the advantageous section, there is a third end condition (the number of games from the start of the advantageous section is 1500 games) that is prioritized over the first end condition and the second end condition,
When the third end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended even before the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied.
A third solution is the first or second solution,
When the display by the advantageous section display means is performed, it is possible to output a continuous effect over a plurality of games.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 13 According to the initial invention, even if the advantageous section display means displays the early stage when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, at least a plurality of advantageous condition end conditions are provided. Moreover, since the game may be ended by one instruction function operation game, even after the display by the advantageous section display means, a stirrer for the player (for example, to keep the player to have an expectation) It is possible to output).

14. Original invention 14
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 14 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game is executed in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, a correct answer push order when a push order bell is won) is operated. (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that the control (management) of the AT is performed not only by the sub control board but also by the main control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
However, in the conventional technology, it was common to perform an AT lottery even in a game that became inside after winning a special role, but a game that tries to keep the inside until the AT is won Since the number of players has increased, it is said that it is desirable not to perform the AT lottery in the games that have recently become inside.
In addition, as a stop result with a high expectation of winning the AT, middle-tier cherry (rare small role) is known.
Here, when the middle tier cherry appears after the player is inside the special role (after the player knows that the special role has been won), there is a problem that the player is given a wasteful impression. ..
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is not to stop the combination of symbols that can be expected to move to the advantageous section when the transition to the advantageous section is not decided after the inside of the special role. ..

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Original Invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section,
A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so as to have a specific win (small win E1 alone) or special win (1BB win).
Reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling the reel when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means,
The winning probability of a specific win is the same for all settings,
The special winning includes the winning of the special role that carries the winning to the next game until the combination of the symbols stops,
When the transition condition to the advantage section is satisfied, the transition to the advantage section is made, and when the termination condition of the advantage section is satisfied, the advantage section is ended,
In the normal section, when it becomes a specific winning, it is possible to decide to move to the advantageous section,
Even if it becomes a specific winning in the normal section, if you have carried over the winning of the special part, you do not decide to move to the advantageous section,
The reel control means,
In the game in the normal section where the winning of the special role has not been carried over, when the specific winning is reached, the combination A of the symbols (the combination of the symbols in which the middle cherry is displayed) is controlled to be stopped,
In the game in the normal section where the winning of the special role is carried over, when the specific winning is achieved, it is prioritized to stop the symbol combination B (the symbol combination in which the middle tier cherry is not displayed) rather than the symbol combination A. It is characterized by controlling as follows.
The second solution is the first solution,
The profit when the symbol combination A is stopped and the profit when the symbol combination B is stopped are the same (both are two payouts).

(C) Effect of Original Invention 14 According to the original invention, in the non-internal part where the special role is not won, when the specific win is achieved, the winning flag is only the specific win, but the special role is won. When a specific winning is achieved inside the player, the winning flag is a special part + specific winning. If the winning flags are different, the reel stop control can be made different. Utilizing this, in the specific winning in the non-internal, stop the combination A of the symbols that can be expected to shift to the advantageous section, in the specific winning in the inside, give priority to the stop of the symbol combination B (for example, in the symbol Do not stop combination A).
As a result, when the inside of the special combination comes into play, by eliminating or reducing the stop of the combination A of the symbols which can be expected to shift to the advantageous section, the player is given a wasteful impression. Can be eliminated or reduced.

15. Original invention 15
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 15 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game is executed in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, a correct pressing order when a push order bell is won) is operated. (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that the control (management) of the AT is performed not only by the sub control board but also by the main control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
However, in the conventional technology, even when a winning combination for which a privilege (for example, the number of AT games played) is won during AT, the privilege cannot be granted, for example, the upper limit of privilege is reached. There was a case. However, there is a problem that the player may feel distrust if the privilege is not granted even if a stop result for which the privilege is granted appears.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is, in the case where the prize is awarded as a privilege, when there is a special circumstance that the privilege cannot be awarded, the symbol corresponding to the prize to be awarded It is to prevent the combination of.

(B) Means for solving the problem of invention 15 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (advantageous section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section,
A lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so that there is a case where it becomes a specific win (single win of the small role E1);
Reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling the reel when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means,
When the specific winning is achieved, it becomes possible to stop the symbol combination A (the symbol combination in which the middle cherry is displayed) or the symbol combination B (the symbol combination in which the middle cherry is not displayed),
When the transition condition to the advantage section is satisfied, the transition to the advantage section is made, and when the termination condition of the advantage section is satisfied, the advantage section is ended,
When it becomes a specific winning in the advantageous section, it is possible to decide to give a privilege,
The reel control means, when the stop switch is operated in a specific operation mode (first stop at the right) in the game in which a specific winning is achieved, the combination B of symbols can be stopped, and the combination A of symbols is stopped. Control not to let
When it is decided to win a special prize in the advantageous section and it is decided to give a privilege, without notifying the specific operation mode,
When it is determined that the specific winning is achieved in the advantageous section and the privilege is not granted, the specific operation mode is notified.
The second solution is the first solution,
The profit when the symbol combination A is stopped and the profit when the symbol combination B is stopped are the same (both are two payouts).

(C) Effects of Original Invention 15 According to the initial invention, there are cases where a privilege is awarded based on a specific winning and cases where it is not awarded during an advantageous section. Although the combination A of the corresponding symbols is stopped, when the privilege is not given (for example, when the number of games in the advantageous section is close to the upper limit), the combination A of the symbols appears by notifying (instructing) the specific operation mode. Do not let As a result, in a situation where the privilege cannot be granted, it is possible to perform control so that the symbol combination A does not appear. Therefore, despite the appearance of the symbol combination A, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust that the privilege is not granted.

16. Original invention 16
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 16 The initial invention is a slot having a winning combination in which the same winning combination is won regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch, and a winning combination in which the winning combination is different depending on the operating mode of the stop switch. It's about the machine.
Conventionally, it is known to execute an instruction function operation game (AT) in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, a correct pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) is operated (AT). See JP-A-2014-161344).
In addition, it is known to provide a win (for example, a push bell) that makes the winning combination different depending on the operation mode of the stop switch and a winning (for example, a common bell) that wins the same winning combination regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch. Has been.
If the winning probabilities of the push-order bell and the common bell are varied according to the set value, the payout rate will be suitable for the set value. However, if the winning probabilities are varied according to the set value, there is a problem that the set value is easily guessed by counting the number of winnings.
Therefore, the problem initially solved by the invention is regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch, and whether or not the winning combination is won or not depending on the operation mode of the stop switch. This is to prevent the set value from being guessed while providing a difference commensurate with the set value in the winning probability when a win (for example, a common bell) for winning the winning combination is provided.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Original Invention 16 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
When,
A lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so that the first win (winning of small win A) or the second win (winning of small win B group)
Reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling the reel when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means,
The winning probability of the first winning is different in at least two setting values,
The winning probability of the second winning is different in at least two setting values,
The reel control means stops the predetermined symbol combination (“black 7/watermelon”-“bell C”-“replay”) in the first winning game regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch. ,
The reel control means controls the reels to stop in the second winning game, depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, to stop the combination of the predetermined symbols and to stop the combination. ,
As set values, set value x (setting 1) and set value y (setting 6)
"The winning probability of the first winning of the setting value y (register number "1250")"-"The winning probability of the first winning of the setting value x (register number "1000")"=p1 (register difference "250"),
"Winning probability of second winning of set value y (register "770" x 12)"-"Winning probability of second winning of set value x (register "750" x 12)" = p2 (register difference "240")
And when
p1>p2
It is characterized by
The second solution is the first solution,
The number of payouts of the game medium (9) when the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped is a maximum payout number with respect to the number of game media inserted (3) in the game.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 16 According to the initial invention, the combination of the same symbols (the combination of the predetermined symbols) is stopped at the time of the first winning and at the time of the correct pushing order at the time of the second winning. Just by stopping the combination of symbols, it is not possible to judge whether the winning is the first winning or the second winning.
On the other hand, since the winning probability of the first winning regardless of the skill of the player has a larger setting difference than that of the second winning, the payout rate can be set according to the set value.

17. Original invention 17
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 17 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having a winning combination in which a winning combination is different depending on an operation mode of a stop switch.
Conventionally, it is known to execute an instruction function operation game (AT) in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, a correct pressing order when a pressing order bell is won) is operated (AT). See JP-A-2014-161344).
Here, this time, an advantageous section is provided, and at least one instruction function operation game is executed during the advantage section, and the instruction function operation game is the maximum payout number in the prescribed number of the game state. Etc. are being considered.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to enable early execution of the instruction function operation game when the above-mentioned one instruction function operation game is executed.

(B) Means for solving the problem of invention 17 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means (role) that performs a lottery so that there may be a first win (winning of small win A), a second win (winning of small win B group), or a third win (winning of small win C group). Lottery means 61),
Reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling the reel when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means,
The winning probability of the first winning is different in at least two setting values,
The reel control means,
In the first winning game, regardless of the operation mode of the stop switch, a predetermined symbol combination (“black 7/watermelon”-“bell C”-“replay”) is stopped,
In the second winning game, depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, stop control of the reel so as to have a case where the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped and a case where it is not stopped,
In the game that has won the third prize, depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, when stopping a combination of specific symbols (“bell A/bell B”-“blue 7/cherry”-“watermelon”) and stopping Stop control of the reel so as to have a case where
The number of payouts of the game medium (9) when the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped is the maximum number of payouts with respect to the specified number of the game media in the game,
The winning probability of the second winning (for example, setting 1 and the number "750" x 12) is set higher than the winning probability of the third winning (for example setting 1 and number "200" x 3). Is characterized by.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 17 According to the original invention, the probability of winning the second prize is higher than the probability of winning the third prize, so as soon as possible, “get the maximum number of payouts for the specified number of game states”. At least one possible instruction function operation game can be executed.

18. Original invention 18
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 18 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game is executed in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, a correct answer push order when a push order bell is won) is operated. (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that the control (management) of the AT is performed not only by the sub control board but also by the main control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
However, when the combination of the same symbols can be stopped, both of the combination of the combination of the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the combination of the combination of the combination and the combination of the combination of the combination and the combination of the combination of the combination and the combination of the combination of the combination and the combination of the combination that do not become the combination of the combinations will be a problem ..
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately perform reel stop control at the time of winning of these winning combinations, when a winning combination that causes a transition to the advantageous section and a winning combination that does not trigger a transition are provided. Is.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 18 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so that the first win (winning of the small win E1) or the second win (winning of the small win E2) may occur.
Reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling the reel when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means,
The winning probability of the first win is the same for all settings,
The winning probability of the second winning is different in at least two setting values,
When the transition condition to the advantage section is satisfied, the transition to the advantage section is made, and when the termination condition of the advantage section is satisfied, the advantage section is ended,
If you win the first win in the regular section, you can decide to move to the advantageous section,
When it is the second winning in the normal section, it is not decided to move to the advantageous section,
The reel control means executes the same stop control for both the first-winning game and the second-winning game (when the left or middle first stop can stop the middle-tier cherry, the right first Middle cherry is not stopped at one stop)
It is characterized by

The second solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means (role lottery means 61) for executing a lottery so that the first win (winning of the small win E1) or the second win (winning of the small win E2) may occur.
Reel control means (65) for stopping and controlling the reel when the stop switch is operated based on the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means,
The winning probability of the first win is the same for all settings,
The winning probability of the second winning is different in at least two setting values,
When the transition condition to the advantage section is satisfied, the transition to the advantage section is made, and when the termination condition of the advantage section is satisfied, the advantage section is ended,
If you win the first win in the regular section, you can decide to move to the advantageous section,
When it is the second winning in the normal section, it is not decided to move to the advantageous section,
The reel control means,
In the first winning game, depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, stop control of the reel so as to have a case where a predetermined symbol combination (middle cherry) is stopped and a case where it is not stopped,
In the second winning game, depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, stop control of the reel so as to have a case where the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped and a case where it is not stopped,
In the first winning game and the second winning game, when the stop switch is operated in an operation mode (left or middle first stop) for stopping the combination of the predetermined symbols, the same stop By the control, the combination of the predetermined symbols is stopped (priority is given to the winning of the small win 36 that stops the middle-tier cherry, and when the small win 36 cannot be won, the small win 38 is won), When the stop switch is not operated in the operation mode of stopping the combination (right first stop), different stop control is executed (for example, the small winning combination 38 is won in the first winning, and the second winning is won). , Win the small role 41)
It is characterized by

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 18 According to the first solving means, since the same stop control is executed in both the first winning and the second winning, it is possible to determine to shift to the advantageous section. The player does not know whether it is a single winning or a second winning that does not decide to shift to the advantageous section. For this reason, it is possible to give the player the impression that there is a setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, although there is no setting difference.
Further, according to the second solving means, at the time of the first winning or the second winning, when the stop switch is operated in the manner of stopping the combination of the predetermined symbols, it is possible to decide to shift to the advantageous section. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether it is the first winning or the second winning that does not decide to shift to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when the stop switch is not operated in the operation mode for stopping the combination of the predetermined symbols, it is the first winning that can be decided to shift to the advantageous section due to a stop result or the like, or the advantageous section. It is possible for the player to determine whether or not it is the second winning that does not decide to shift to.

19. Original invention 19
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 19 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game is executed in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, a correct answer push order when a push order bell is won) is operated. (AT) is known.
Here, it is known that the control (management) of the AT is performed not only by the sub control board but also by the main control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
By the way, when shifting to the special game during the advantageous section, it is desired that the higher the set value is, the more the privilege is given during the advantageous section. However, in the case where the privilege is given in association with the winning of the condition device, there is a request that the privilege should be given on the condition that the condition device having no setting difference is won.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to give a privilege on the condition that the condition device having no setting difference is won when the special game is moved to during the advantageous section. Is to increase the probability of being granted.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 19 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
And a lottery means for executing a lottery so that a special win including a special role (winning including 1 BBA) may occur.
The probability of winning a special win is the same for all settings,
When the transition condition to the advantage section is satisfied, the transition to the advantage section is made, and when the termination condition of the advantage section is satisfied, the advantage section is ended,
Special winning, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination stopped, shift to special game (1BBA is operating),
The special game ending condition is set when the number of payouts of the game medium exceeds a predetermined number (150),
The lottery means performs a lottery so as to have a specific win (win of replay D) in a special game,
The winning probability of the specific win in the special game is the same for all set values,
When a special winning is achieved in a special game during an advantageous section, it is possible to decide to give a privilege (add an advantageous section),
As set values, set value x (setting 1) and set value y (setting 6)
The expected value of the number of games during the special game when the set value y is set is larger than the expected value of the number of games during the special game when the set value x is set.

The second solution is the first solution,
In the special game, the lottery means performs a lottery so that it may be a first win or a second win,
The winning probability of the first win (small win A win) differs in at least two setting values,
The winning probability of the second winning (small winning E2) is different in at least two setting values,
The number of payouts of the game medium when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first winning is stopped is larger than the number of payouts of the game medium when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second winning is stopped,
The winning probability of the first winning in the special game is set higher when the set value x is set than when the set value y is set,
The winning probability of the second winning in the special game is set to be lower when the set value x is set than when the set value y is set.
A third solution is the first or second solution,
The specific winning is a winning relating to a predetermined re-playing combination,
In the special game, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined re-play combination is stopped, it is not counted in the payout number of the game medium during the special game.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 19 According to the initial invention, when the special game is started, the set value y has a larger expected value of the number of games staying in the special game than the set value x. Therefore, the special game with the set value y has a higher probability of being a specific win than the special game with the set value x. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that the privilege is given to the set value y in the special game in the advantageous section, compared to the set value x.

20. Original invention 20
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 20 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game is executed in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, a correct answer push order when a push order bell is won) is operated. (AT) is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Here, when a special game is given during a transition to a special game during an advantageous section, the special game based on the fact that a special combination having no setting difference is won can be provided with the special combination, and a special combination having a setting difference can be given. There is a request not to grant the special game in the special game based on winning.
However, if such a setting is made, there is a problem in that the special game based on the fact that a special combination having a setting difference is won cannot give the player an expectation of granting a privilege.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make it possible to expect the award of a privilege even when the special game based on the winning of a special combination having a setting difference is made.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 20 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13) for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
A first special winning including a first special winning combination (1BBA) or a second special winning including a second special winning combination (1BBB), and a lottery means for executing a lottery,
The winning probability of the first special win is the same for all settings,
The winning probability of the second special winning is different in at least two setting values,
When the transition condition to the advantage section is satisfied, the transition to the advantage section is made, and when the termination condition of the advantage section is satisfied, the advantage section is ended,
It becomes the first special winning, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first special combination is stopped, it shifts to the first special game,
It becomes the second special winning, and when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second special combination is stopped, it shifts to the second special game,
During the first special game in the advantageous section, it is possible to decide to give a privilege,
During the second special game in the advantageous section, it is not decided to grant the privilege,
After the second special game in the advantageous section is finished, it is possible to decide to grant the privilege under a predetermined condition.

The second solution is the first solution,
When the first special game is over, shift to the first game state (non-RT),
When the second special game is over, shift to a second game state (RT1) different from the first game state,
In the second gaming state, the winning probability of the specific winning (replay E winning) is set higher than in the first gaming state,
The winning probability of a specific win is the same for all settings,
The feature is that it is possible to decide to grant a privilege when a specific winning is achieved in the advantageous section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 20 According to the initial invention, a first special game that can decide to grant a privilege during an advantageous section and a second special game that does not decide to grant a privilege during an advantageous section. Since it is possible to grant the privilege based on the completion of the second special game when the above is provided, the expectation that the privilege will be granted is given even when the game shifts to the second special game. be able to.
In addition, it is possible to balance the first special game and the second special game with respect to a specific grant, and to give uniqueness to the timing of granting each privilege.

21. Original invention 21
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 21 Conventionally, an instruction function operation game is executed in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, a correct answer push order when a push order bell is won) is operated. (AT) is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-161344).
Here, in the case where the advantageous section is provided, when the special part is won during the advantageous section and the special game is started, whether or not to continue counting the advantageous section (for example, subtraction of the number of games) becomes a problem. ..
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to adjust the count of the advantageous section when the special game is started during the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 21 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention was
A game having an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small group B group),
In a game that has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game that activates an instruction function that displays the advantageous operation mode (displays push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78),
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Of the game section, it comprises an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
When the transition condition to the advantage section is satisfied, the transition to the advantage section is made, and when the termination condition of the advantage section is satisfied, the advantage section is ended,
A first counter (advantageous section counter 69a) which counts a first variable for determining whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied;
A second counter (upper limit counter 69b) for counting a second variable for determining whether or not the upper limit end condition of the advantageous zone is satisfied;
A first special winning including a first special winning combination (1BBA) or a second special winning including a second special winning combination (1BBB), and a lottery means for executing a lottery,
When it is determined that the ending condition is satisfied based on the count value of the first counter, the advantageous section is ended,
When it is determined that the upper limit end condition is satisfied based on the count value of the second counter, the advantageous section is ended even before the end condition is satisfied,
It becomes the first special winning, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first special combination is stopped, it shifts to the first special game,
It becomes the second special winning, and when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second special combination is stopped, it shifts to the second special game,
During the first special game in the advantageous zone, it is possible to decide to add the advantageous zone,
When adding an advantageous section, extend the termination condition,
During the second special game in the advantageous zone, it is not decided to add the advantageous zone,
During the first special game, the first counter and the second counter can be updated,
The second counter can be updated during the second special game, and the first counter is not updated.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 21 According to the original invention, the first counter is updated in the first special game in which it is possible to decide to add an advantageous section, but the second special game in which it is not decided to add an advantageous section. Then, since the first counter is not updated, it is possible to balance the counts of the advantageous section between the first special game and the second special game.

1 Base Part 10 Slot Machine 11 Power Switch 12 Setting Key Switch 13 Setting Switch 14 Reset Switch 15 Door Switch 16 Board Case 16a Caulking Part 17 Display Window 21 Production Lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image Display Device 24 Cross Key 25 Menu Button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 reel sensor 35 hopper 36 hopper motor 37 payout sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 start switch 42 stop switch 43 medal slot 43a passage sensor 44 throw sensor 45 blocker 46 adjustment switch 50 (50A, 50B) main control board ( Main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 winning lottery means 62 winning flag control means 63 pushing order instruction number selecting means 64 production group number selecting means 65 reel controlling means 66 winning determination means 67 payout means 68 RT controlling means 69 advantageous zone controlling means 69a advantageous zone counter 69b upper limit counter 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command transmission means 72 Management information control means 73 Set value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED
77 Advantageous zone display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
91 production output control means 100 external centralized terminal board 200 hall computer

Claims (1)

As a game section,
A first section that does not inform the player of an advantageous operation mode,
And a second section capable of informing the player of an advantageous operation mode,
A predetermined storage means including a first storage area and a second storage area;
A first updating unit capable of updating the information stored in the first storage area;
Second updating means capable of updating the information stored in the second storage area;
With external signal output means,
When the information stored in the first storage area reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the information stored in the first storage area and the information stored in the second storage area are not updated. ,
Based on the information stored in the first storage area and the information stored in the second storage area, information regarding the second section ratio, which is the rate of staying in the second section with respect to all the game sections, is displayed. Can be generated,
The external signal output means can output information regarding the second section ratio, which is the ratio of staying in the second section to all the game sections, to the outside,
A game machine characterized in that, when a game is executed a predetermined number of times in the second section, the second section ends.

Images